libreoffice-help-en-gb 1:3.5.2-2ubuntu1 / usr / share / libreoffice / help / en-GB / swriter.ht

13 .uno%3AClosePreview 39 To exit the page preview, click the Close Preview button.
13 .uno%3APrintPreview 3d Displays a preview of the printed page or closes the preview.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TLB_TREELISTBOX 1c Select a database and table.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_INDIVIDUAL 37 Click to create one document for every one data record.
33 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_GENERATE_FROM_DATABASE 3a Generate each file name from data contained in a database.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FROM 37 Specifies which records to include in your form letter.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ALB_COLUMN 51 Uses the content of the selected data field as the file name for the form letter.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3AED_PATH 2d Specifies the path to store the form letters.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_TO 36 Specifies the number of the last record to be printed.
22 SW_LISTBOX_DLG_MAILMERGE_LB_FILTER 17 Select the file format.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_MARKED 99 Processes only the marked records from the database. This option is only available when you have previously marked the necessary records in the database.
2f SW_RADIOBUTTON_DLG_MAILMERGE_RB_SAVE_SINGLE_DOC 3d Click to create one big document containing all data records.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ACB_SINGLE_JOBS 3f Prints each form letter individually with the selected printer.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_ALL 2c Processes all the records from the database.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_PRINTER 18 Prints the form letters.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ANF_FROM 37 Specifies the number of the first record to be printed.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3ARB_FILE 20 Saves the form letters in files.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MAILMERGE%3APB_PATH 23 Opens the Select Path dialogue box.
1f .uno%3ASendOutlineToStarImpress 48 Sends the outline of the active document to a new presentation document.
1d .uno%3ASendOutlineToClipboard 4b Sends the outline of a document to the clipboard in Rich Text Format (RTF).
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_ABSTRACT%3ANF_PARA 74 Specify the maximum number of consecutive paragraphs to be included in the AutoAbstract document after each heading.
15 .uno%3ACreateAbstract bc Copies the headings and a number of subsequent paragraphs in the active document to a new AutoAbstract text document. An AutoAbstract is useful for obtaining an overview of long documents.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_ABSTRACT%3ANF_LEVEL 48 Enter the extent of the outline levels to be copied to the new document.
20 .uno%3ASendAbstractToStarImpress 96 Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
11 .uno%3ANewHtmlDoc bc Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document.
22 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
26 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 54 Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page.
27 SW_HID_SEND_HTML_CTRL_PUSHBUTTON_CANCEL bc Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document.
10 .uno%3ANavigator e9 Shows or hides the Navigator, with which you can quickly jump to different parts of your document. You can also use the Navigator to insert elements from the current document or other open documents, and to organise master documents.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_HYP a3 Creates a hyperlink when you drag-and-drop an item into the current document. Click the hyperlink in the document to jump to the item that the hyperlink points to.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX9 f1 Click here to set a reminder at the current cursor position. You can define up to five reminders. To jump to a reminder, click the Navigation icon, in the Navigation window click the Reminder icon, and then click the Previous or Next button.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX13 74 Click this icon, and then choose the number of heading outline levels that you want to view in the Navigator window.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX16 52 Type the number of the page number that you want to jump to, and then press Enter.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX11 4d Moves the cursor to the footer, or from the footer to the document text area.
14 SW_HID_NAVI_OUTLINES 68 Click 1 to only view the top level headings in the Navigator window, and 10 to view all of the headings.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX7 22 Shows or hides the Navigator list.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX4 b5 Sets the drag-and-drop options for inserting items from the Navigator into a document, for example, as a hyperlink. Click this icon, and then choose the option that you want to use.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX8 5a Switches between the display of all categories in the Navigator and the selected category.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX5 f3 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, up one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX24 c5 Opens the Navigation toolbar, with which you can quickly jump to the next or the previous item in the category that you select. Select the category, and then click the "Previous" and "Next" arrows.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX3 a5 Jumps to the next item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Graphics".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX12 38 Jumps between the footnote text and the footnote anchor.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX6 f5 Moves the selected heading, and the text below the heading, down one heading position in the Navigator and in the document. To move only the selected heading and not the text associated with the heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
18 SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_LISTBOX 101 Lists the names of all open text documents. To view the content of a document in the Navigator window, select the name of the document in the list. The current document displayed in the Navigator is indicated by the word "active" after its name in the list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX14 d1 Increases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only increase the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_COPY a6 Inserts a copy of the selected item where you drag-and-drop in the current document. You cannot drag-and-drop copies of graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes.
10 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX2 a9 Jumps to the previous item in the document. To specify the type of item to jump to, click the Navigation icon, and then click an item category - for example, "Graphics".
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX10 4d Moves the cursor to the header, or from the header to the document text area.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX15 d1 Decreases the outline level of the selected heading, and the headings that occur below the heading, by one. To only decrease the outline level of the selected heading, hold down Ctrl, and then click this icon.
15 SW_HID_NAVI_DRAG_LINK 161 Inserts the selected item as a link where you drag-and-drop in the current document. Text is inserted as protected sections. The contents of the link are automatically updated when the source is changed. To manually update the links in a document, choose Tools - Update - Links. You cannot create links for graphics, OLE objects, references and indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX17 4a Switches between master view and normal view if a master document is open.
1e SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA_ERROR 3c Select this icon to browse through incorrect table formulae.
18 SW_HID_NID_TABLE_FORMULA 32 Select this icon to browse through table formulae.
e SW_HID_NID_FRM 2f Select this icon to browse through text frames.
e SW_HID_NID_GRF 2c Select this icon to browse through graphics.
f SW_HID_NID_MARK 2d Select this icon to browse through reminders.
e SW_HID_NID_REG 2c Select this icon to browse through sections.
e SW_HID_NAVI_VS 115 Click the icon for the type of objects you want to browse through. Then click either the "Previous Object" or "Next Object" arrow buttons. The names of these buttons indicate the type of object you have selected. The text cursor is placed on whichever object you have selected.
e SW_HID_NID_DRW 33 Select this icon to browse through drawing objects.
14 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEDOWN 3b Click the down button to scroll to the next page or object.
e SW_HID_NID_TBL 2a Select this icon to browse through tables.
e SW_HID_NID_FTN 2d Select this icon to browse through footnotes.
f SW_HID_NID_PREV 3c Sets the cursor to the previous object of the selected type.
11 SW_HID_NID_POSTIT 2c Select this icon to browse through comments.
f SW_HID_NID_NEXT 38 Sets the cursor to the next object of the selected type.
10 SW_HID_SCRL_NAVI b5 If you click this icon in the Navigator or in the lower right of the document window, a toolbar will appear which enables you to choose among the existing targets within a document.
f SW_HID_NID_OUTL 2c Select this icon to browse through headings.
e SW_HID_NID_SEL 2e Select this icon to browse through selections.
13 SW_HID_NID_SRCH_REP 32 Select this icon to browse through search results.
e SW_HID_NID_PGE 29 Select this icon to browse through pages.
f SW_HID_NID_CTRL 32 Select this icon to browse through control fields.
e SW_HID_NID_OLE 2f Select this icon to browse through OLE objects.
12 SW_HID_SCRL_PAGEUP 3d Click the up button to scroll to the previous page or object.
e SW_HID_NID_BKM 2d Select this icon to browse through bookmarks.
16 SW_HID_NID_INDEX_ENTRY 31 Select this icon to browse through index entries.
1b SW_HID_MD_COPY_TO_CLIPBOARD 2e Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard.
16 SW_HID_GLOS_GROUP_TREE 43 Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths.
14 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_MACRO 62 Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, with which you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_NET_REL 2c Links to files on the Internet are relative.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_FILE_REL 3c Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_RENAME 68 Opens the Rename AutoText dialogue box, in which you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3AED_SHORTNAME 96 Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3AED_NAME bc Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New.
f SW_HID_BIB_BASE 2e Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories.
13 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_EDIT a0 Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close.
13 .uno%3AEditGlossary d9 Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_RENAME 5e Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box.
1a SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DEFINE_TEXT d5 Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. You must first enter a name before you see this command.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_IMPORT 91 Opens a dialogue box in which you can select the MS 97/2000/XP Word document or template containing the AutoText entries that you want to import.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3ALB_PATH be Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_INSERT_TIP 123 Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3AED_NAME bb Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3ACB_SHOW_EXAMPLE 39 Turns on or off a preview of the selected AutoText entry.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_PATH 5b Opens the Edit Paths dialogue box, in which you can select the directory to store AutoText.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_BIB 2e Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories.
16 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_REPLACE 6d Replaces the content of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that was made in the current document.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_NEW 50 Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DEFINE cf Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. You must first enter a name before you see this command.
28 sw%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_GLOSSARY%3APB_EDIT 89 Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_NS 32 Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_NN 36 Type the new name for the selected AutoText component.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_OS 32 Assigns a shortcut to the selected AutoText entry.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_RENAME_GLOS%3AED_ON 38 Displays the current name of the selected AutoText item.
1d .uno%3AAuthoritiesEntryDialog 26 Edits the selected bibliography entry.
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_NEXT 39 Jumps to the next field of the same type in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKNUMFORMAT b1 Select the format for the content of the field. For date, time, and user-defined fields, you can also click "Additional formats" in the list, and then choose a different format.
16 SW_HID_DLG_FLDEDT_PREV 3d Jumps to the previous field of the same type in the document.
12 .uno%3AFieldDialog 7e Opens a dialogue box in which you can edit the properties of a field. Click in front of a field, and then choose this command.
13 .uno%3AEditFootnote 77 Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command.
2d sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ABT_PREV 41 Moves to the previous footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
23 sw%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE 77 Edits the selected footnote or endnote anchor. Click in front of the footnote or endnote, and then choose this command.
2d sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ABT_NEXT 3d Moves to the next footnote or endnote anchor in the document.
1f SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PREV_SAME 40 Jumps to the first index entry of the same type in the document.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MULTMRK%3ALB_TOX 3e Displays the type of index that the selected entry belongs to.
1f SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_NEXT_SAME 3f Jumps to the last index entry of the same type in the document.
1c SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_DELETE 59 Deletes the selected entry from the index. The entry text in the document is not deleted.
17 .uno%3AIndexEntryDialog 66 Edits the selected index entry. Click in front of or in the index entry, and then choose this command.
1a SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_NEXT 3f Jumps to the next index entry of the same type in the document.
1a SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PREV 43 Jumps to the previous index entry of the same type in the document.
12 SW_HID_REGION_TREE 58 Type the name of the section that you want to edit, or click a name in the Section list.
2d sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_DISMISS 6a Removes the selected section from the document, and inserts the contents of the section into the document.
11 .uno%3AEditRegion 3c Changes the properties of sections defined in your document.
c .uno%3ARuler 9b Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page.
11 .uno%3AViewBounds 62 Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed.
c .uno%3AMarks 76 Shows or hides field shadings in your document, including non-breaking spaces, custom hyphens, indexes, and footnotes.
11 .uno%3AFieldnames 42 Switches the field display between field names and field contents.
13 .uno%3AControlCodes 68 Shows non-printing characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces.
11 .uno%3ABrowseView 2f Displays the document as seen in a Web browser.
12 .uno%3APrintLayout 36 Displays how the document will look when you print it.
1b .uno%3AShowHiddenParagraphs 21 Shows or hides hidden paragraphs.
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_PAGE cd Inserts a manual page break, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next page. The inserted page break is indicated by a non-printing border at the top of the new page.
25 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_COL ef Inserts a manual column break (in a multiple column layout), and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the beginning of the next column. A manual column break is indicated by a non-printing border at the top of the new column.
22 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_BREAK%3ALB_COLL 46 Select the page style for the page that follows the manual page break.
2a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_BREAK%3AED_PAGENUM 4a Enter the new page number for the page that follows the manual page break.
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_BREAK%3ARB_LINE 7e Ends the current line, and moves the text found to the right of the cursor to the next line, without creating a new paragraph.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_BREAK%3ACB_PAGENUM c7 Assigns the page number that you specify to the page that follows the manual page break. This option is only available if you assign a different page style to the page that follows manual page break.
12 .uno%3AInsertBreak 59 Inserts a manual line break, column break or a page break at the current cursor position.
14 .uno%3AInsertSection 137 Inserts a text section at the cursor position in the document. You can also select a block of text and then choose this command to create a section. You can use sections to insert blocks of text from other documents, to apply custom column layouts, or to protect or to hide blocks of text if a condition is met.
2c sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_RNAME 20 Type a name for the new section.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_CONDITION 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_DDE 9f Creates a DDE link. Mark this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is marked.
2b sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_FILE 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_PROTECT 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
24 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_FILE 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ALB_SUBREG 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
2e sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_PROTECT 30 Prevents the selected section from being edited.
2c sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3APB_PASSWD 42 Opens a dialogue box in which you can change the current password.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3AED_FILE 7a Enter the path and the filename for the file that you want to insert, or click the browse button (...) to locate the file.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3APB_FILE 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_DDE 9f Creates a DDE link. Mark this check box, and then enter the DDE command that you want to use. The DDE option is only available if the Link check box is marked.
2b sw%3ATriStateBox%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3ACB_HIDE 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
2a sw%3APushButton%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3APB_FILE 49 Locate the file that you want to insert as a link, and then click Insert.
2d sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ALB_SUBREG 41 Select the section in the file that you want to insert as a link.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_FILE 61 Inserts the contents of another document or section from another document in the current section.
26 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_RANAME 20 Type a name for the new section.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_HIDE 3b Hides and prevents the selected section from being printed.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3APB_PASSWD 42 Opens a dialogue box in which you can change the current password.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_INSERT_SECTION%3ACB_PASSWD 60 Protects the selected section with a password. The password must have a minimum of 5 characters.
29 sw%3AEdit%3AMD_EDIT_REGION%3AED_CONDITION 39 Enter the condition that must be met to hide the section.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_SECTION_INDENTS%3AMF_AFTER 3d Specifies the indents after the section, at the right margin.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_SECTION_INDENTS%3AMF_BEFORE 3d Specifies the indents before the section, at the left margin.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_NUMBER_AUTO 57 Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_TYPE_FTN 78 Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page.
1b .uno%3AInsertFootnoteDialog 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
33 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ABT_NUMBER_CHAR 3d Inserts a special character  as a footnote or endnote anchor.
2d sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3AED_NUMBER_CHAR 4c Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_TYPE_ENDNOTE 79 Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document.
14 .uno%3AInsertEndnote 79 Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds an endnote at the end of the document.
15 .uno%3AInsertFootnote 75 Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_INS_FOOTNOTE%3ARB_NUMBER_CHAR 4c Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote.
31 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_INSERT_BOOKMARK%3ACB_BOOKMARK c0 Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. The lower list contains all of the bookmarks in the current document. To delete a bookmark, select it in the list, and then click Delete.
31 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_INSERT_BOOKMARK%3ABT_DELETE 96 To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Insert Bookmark dialogue box and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialogue box will follow.
15 .uno%3AInsertBookmark 81 Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CAPTION%3AEDT_SEP 51 Enter optional text characters to appear between the number and the caption text.
1a .uno%3AInsertCaptionDialog 5b Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_FORMAT 41 Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_CATEGORY e6 Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the caption number in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABOX_POS 62 Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABTN_AUTOCAPTION 9e Opens the Caption dialogue box. It has the same information as the dialogue box you get by menu %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption in the Options dialogue box.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CAPTION%3AEDT_TEXT 3f Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number.
12 SW_HID_DLG_CAPTION 5b Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ACB_APPLYBAS 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ALB_LEVEL 6f Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 1e Specifies the character style.
2e sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SEQUENCE_OPTION%3AED_SEPARATOR 5e Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CAPTION%3ABTN_OPTION c2 Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document.
15 .uno%3AInsertEnvelope 14 Creates an envelope.
14 SW_HID_ENVELOP_PRINT 30 Creates a new document and inserts the envelope.
15 SW_HID_ENVELOP_INSERT 3d Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ABOX_SEND 68 Includes a return address on the envelope. Mark the Sender check box, and then enter the return address.
e SW_HID_ENV_ENV 96 Enter the delivery and return addresses for the envelope. You can also insert address fields from a database, for example from the Addresses database.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_DATABASE 48 Select the database containing the address data that you want to insert.
2a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3AEDT_SEND 68 Includes a return address on the envelope. Mark the Sender check box, and then enter the return address.
2a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3AEDT_ADDR 1b Enter the delivery address.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_TABLE 4e Select the database table containing the address data that you want to insert.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ABTN_INSERT b0 Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_ENV%3ALB_DBFIELD b0 Select the database field containing the address data that you want to insert, and then click the left arrow button. The data is added to the address box containing the cursor.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SIZE_HEIGHT 21 Enter the height of the envelope.
2c sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABTN_ADDR_EDIT 59 Click and choose the text formatting style for the addressee field that you want to edit.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_ADDR_LEFT 6f Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the addressee field.
2c sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SEND_TOP 6b Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the sender field.
2c sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_ADDR_TOP 6e Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the envelope and the addressee field.
e SW_HID_ENV_FMT 37 Specifies the layout and the dimension of the envelope.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SIZE_WIDTH 20 Enter the width of the envelope.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3AFLD_SEND_LEFT 6c Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left edge of the envelope and the sender field.
2c sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABTN_SEND_EDIT 56 Click and choose the text formatting style for the sender field that you want to edit.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENV_FMT%3ABOX_SIZE_FORMAT 7d Select the envelope size that you want, or select "User-defined", and then enter the width and the height of the custom size.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 7d Opens the Print Setup dialogue box in which you can define additional printer settings, such as paper format and orientation.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3AFLD_DOWN 2e Enter the amount to shift the print area down.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_BOTTOM 45 Feeds the envelope with the print side face down in the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_RGHT 46 Feeds the envelope vertically from the right edge of the printer tray.
e SW_HID_ENV_PRT 27 Set the print options for the envelope.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_CNTR 42 Feeds the envelope vertically from the centre of the printer tray.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3ABTN_TOP 43 Feeds the envelope with the print side face up in the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_VER_LEFT 45 Feeds the envelope vertically from the left edge of the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_RGHT 48 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the right edge of the printer tray.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_LEFT 47 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the left edge of the printer tray.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_ENV_PRT%3AFLD_RIGHT 36 Enter the amount to shift the print area to the right.
13 SW_HID_ITM_HOR_CNTR 44 Feeds the envelope horizontally from the centre of the printer tray.
12 SW_HID_FIELD_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
13 SW_HID_FIELD_INSERT 7d Inserts the selected field at the current cursor position in the document. To close the dialogue box, click the Close button.
12 .uno%3AInsertField 2f Inserts a field at the current cursor position.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKDATEOFF 40 Enter the offset that you want to apply to a date or time field.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKLEVEL 50 Select the chapter heading level that you want to include in the selected field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3AED_DOKVALUE 57 Enter the offset value that you want to apply to a page number field, for example "+1".
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ACB_DOKFIXEDCONTENT 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKSELECTION 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
e SW_HID_FLD_DOK 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOK%3ALB_DOKTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_REF%3AED_REFNAME 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFFORMAT 48 Select the format that you want to use for the selected reference field.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFSELECTION b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_REF%3ALB_REFTYPE 91 Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Selection list, and then click Insert.
1b SW_HID_REFSELECTION_TOOLTIP b6 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, select a format in the "Insert reference to" list, and then click Insert.
1b .uno%3AInsertReferenceField bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_REF%3AED_REFVALUE f Edit the value.
e SW_HID_FLD_REF bf This is where you insert the references or referenced fields into the current document. References are referenced fields within the same document or within sub-documents of a master document.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_EDIT 57 Displays the Edit Fields: Functions dialogue box, in which you can edit the Input list.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_LISTNAME 27 Enter a unique name for the Input list.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTREMOVE 28 Removes the selected item from the list.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTADD 1a Adds the Item to the list.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ABT_FUNCMACRO 7c Opens the Macro Selector, in which you can choose the macro that will run when you click the selected field in the document.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTUP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3ALB_LISTITEMS 48 Choose the item that you want to display in the document, then click OK.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_FUNCTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCCOND2 8b Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_LISTITEM 11 Enter a new item.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCVALUE 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
f SW_HID_FLD_FUNC 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3APB_LISTDOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_DROPDOWN%3APB_NEXT 42 Closes the current Input list and displays the next, if available.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_FUNCFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCNAME 70 Sets additional function parameters for fields. The type of parameter depends on the field type that you select.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3ALB_LISTITEMS 3b Lists the items. The topmost item is shown in the document.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_FUNC%3AED_FUNCCOND1 8b Enter the text to display when the condition is met in the Then box, and the text to display when the condition is not met in the Else box.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ALB_DOKINFFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
11 SW_HID_FLD_DOKINF 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ACB_DOKINFFIXEDCONTENT 4a Inserts the field as static content, that is, the field cannot be updated.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DOKINF%3ALB_DOKINFSELECTION 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
16 SW_HID_FIELD_DINF_TYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARSEPARATOR 5d Type the character that you want to use as a separator between the heading or chapter levels.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARCHAPTERLEVEL 52 Choose the heading or chapter level at which to restart numbering in the document.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ACB_VARINVISIBLE 29 Hides the field contents in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARNUMFORMAT 77 Click the format that you want to apply to the selected field, or click "Additional formats" to define a custom format.
e SW_HID_FLD_VAR 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARNAME 40 Type the name of the user-defined field that you want to create.
14 SW_HID_FLDVAR_DELETE 7d Removes the user-defined field from the selection list. You can only remove fields that are not used in the current document.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3AED_VARVALUE 40 Enter the contents that you want to add to a user-defined field.
13 SW_HID_FLDVAR_APPLY 32 Adds the user-defined field to the Selection list.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARFORMAT 48 In the Format list, define if the value is inserted as text or a number.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_VAR%3ALB_VARSELECTION 83 Lists the available fields for the field type selected in the Type list. To insert a field, click the field, and then click Insert.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ARB_DBOWNFORMAT 31 Uses the format defined in the selected database.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ARB_DBFORMAT 47 Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DB%3AED_DBCONDITION 3a For fields linked to a condition, enter the criteria here.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBNUMFORMAT 29 Lists the available user-defined formats.
d SW_HID_FLD_DB 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FLD_DB%3APB_ADDDB 8b Opens a file open dialogue box in which you can select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list.
17 SW_HID_DB_SELECTION_TLB 54 Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FLD_DB%3AED_DBSETNUMBER 62 Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met.
15 SW_HID_PRINT_AS_MERGE e0 When you print a document that contains database fields, a dialogue box asks you if you want to print a form letter. If you answer Yes, the Mail Merge dialogue box opens in which you can select the database records to print.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBTYPE 8e Lists the available field types. To add a field to your document, click a field type, click a field in the Select list, and then click Insert.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FLD_DB%3ALB_DBFORMAT 29 Lists the available user-defined formats.
10 SW_HID_FLD_INPUT 4f Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_FLD_INPUT%3APB_NEXT 2e Jumps to the next input field in the document.
2c sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_FLD_INPUT%3AED_EDIT ba The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialogue box. The lower box displays the content of the field.
1b SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_ENTRY a6 Displays the text that is selected in the document. If you want, you can enter a different word for the index entry. The selected text in the document is not changed.
23 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_SRCH_WORDONLY 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
28 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_SRCH_CASESENSITIVE 3b Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case characters.
1b SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_LEVEL 0 
1b SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
1a SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_TYPE 33 Select the index that you want to add the entry to.
19 .uno%3AInsertIndexesEntry 3c Marks the selected text as index or table of contents entry.
18 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_OK 22 Marks an index entry in your text.
26 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PHONETIC_READING f9 Enter the phonetic reading for the corresponding entry. For example, if a Japanese Kanji word has more than one pronunciation, enter the correct pronunciation as a Katakana word. The Kanji word is then sorted according to the phonetic reading entry.
1f SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_APPLY_ALL 8f Automatically marks all other occurrences of the selected text in the document. Text in headers, footers, frames, and captions is not included.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_NEW_USER_IDX%3AED_NAME 70 Enter a name for the new user-defined index. The new index is added to the list of available indexes and tables.
1d SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_SEC_KEY c9 Makes the current selection a sub-subentry of the 1st key. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key and "winter" as the 2nd key, the index entry is "weather, winter, cold".
1e SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_PRIM_KEY b2 Makes the current selection a subentry of the word that you enter here. For example, if you select "cold", and enter "weather" as the 1st key, the index entry is "weather, cold".
19 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_NEW 5c Opens the Create New User-Defined Index dialogue box in which you can create a custom index.
20 SW_HID_INSERT_IDX_MRK_MAIN_ENTRY 40 Makes the selected text the main entry in an alphabetical index.
17 .uno%3AInsertMultiIndex 47 Inserts an index or a table of contents at the current cursor position.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_STD 4d Resets the formatting of the selected level to the "Default" paragraph style.
2c sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_ASSIGN 43 Formats the selected index level with the selected paragraph style.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ALB_PARALAY 74 Select the paragraph style that you want to apply to the selected index level, and then click the Assign (<) button.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ABT_EDIT_STYLE 5d Opens the Paragraph Style dialogue box, in which you can modify the selected paragraph style.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_STYLES%3ALB_LEVEL 39 Select the index level that you change the formatting of.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_AREA 4f Select whether to create the index for the document or for the current chapter.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_TYPE 31 Select the type of index that you want to insert.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_TOXMARKS 6a Includes the index entries that you inserted by choosing Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry in the index.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMHEADINGS 96 Creates the index using outline levels, that is, paragraphs formatted with one of the predefined heading styles (Heading 1-10) are added to the index.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_ADDSTYLES e7 Includes the paragraph styles that you specify in the Assign Styles dialogue box as index entries. To select the paragraph styles that you want to include in the index, click the Assign Styles (...) button to the right of this box.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_READONLY 36 Prevents the contents of the index from being changed.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3AED_TITLE 25 Enter a title for the selected index.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3APB_ADDSTYLES 6b Opens the Assign Styles dialogue box, in which you can select the paragraph styles to include in the index.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ANF_LEVEL 3b Enter the number of heading levels to include in the index.
14 SW_HID_TP_TOX_SELECT 31 Select the type of index that you want to insert.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_INITIALCAPS 3d Automatically capitalises the first letter of an index entry.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_USEFF 11b Replaces identical index entries, which occur also on the directly following page or pages, with a single entry that lists the first page number and a "p" or "pp". For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10pp", and "View 10, View 11" as "View 10p".
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_USE_DASH d5 Replaces identical index entries that occur on consecutive pages with a single entry and the page range in which the entry occurs. For example, the entries "View 10, View 11, View 12" are combined as "View 10-12".
2d sw%3AMenuButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3AMB_AUTOMARK 2b Select, create, or edit a concordance file.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMFILE 64 Automatically marks index entries using a concordance file - a list of words to include in an index.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_KEYASENTRY 2d Inserts index keys as separate index entries.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_COLLECTSAME c3 Replaces identical index entries with a single entry that lists the page numbers where the entry occurs in the document. For example, the entries "View 10, View 43" are combined as "View 10, 43".
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_SORTALG aa Select numeric when you want to sort numbers by value, such as in 1, 2, 12. Select alphanumeric, when you want to sort the numbers by character code, such as in 1, 12, 2.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 3f Select the language rules to use for sorting the index entries.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_CASESENSITIVE 81 Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case letters in identical index entries. For Asian languages special handling applies.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_CAPTIONSEQUENCE 47 Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ARB_FROMOBJECTNAMES 28 Creates index entries from object names.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_DISPLAYTYPE 46 Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ARB_FROMCAPTIONS 2b Creates index entries from object captions.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMGRAPHICS 1f Includes graphics in the index.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMOLE 22 Includes OLE objects in the index.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_LEVELFROMCHAPTER 78 Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMTABLES 1d Includes tables in the index.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_FROMFRAMES 22 Includes text frames in the index.
12 SW_HID_OLE_CHECKLB 47 Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ALB_BRACKET 42 Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_SELECT%3ACB_SEQUENCE 2f Automatically numbers the bibliography entries.
30 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES%3APB_RIGHT 49 Moves the selected paragraph style down one level in the index hierarchy.
2f sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES%3APB_LEFT 47 Moves the selected paragraph style up one level in the index hierarchy.
19 SW_HID_DLG_ADD_IDX_STYLES 35 Creates index entries from specific paragraph styles.
13 SW_HID_TP_TOX_ENTRY 9b Specify the format of the index or table entries. The appearance of this tab changes to reflect the type of index that you selected on the Index/Table tab.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_PAGENO 25 Inserts the page number of the entry.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ALL_LEVELS 3e Applies the current settings without closing the dialogue box.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_TAB dc Inserts a tab stop. To add leader dots to the tab stop, select a character in the Fill character box. To change the position of the tab stop, enter a value in the Tab stop position box, or mark the Align right check box.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_EDITSTYLE 48 Opens a dialogue box in which you can edit the selected character style.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_ENTRY_NO 7d Only visible when you click the E# button in the Structure line. Select to show the chapter number with or without separator.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ENTRYNO 6d Inserts the chapter number. To assign chapter numbering to a heading style, choose Tools - Outline Numbering.
13 SW_HID_TOKEN_WINDOW 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
15 SW_HID_TOX_ENTRY_EDIT 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_RELTOSTYLE c1 Positions the tab stop relative to the "indent from left" value defined in the paragraph style selected on the Styles tab. Otherwise the tab stop is positioned relative to the left text margin.
2a sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_FILLCHAR 28 Select the tab leader that you want use.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 49 Specify the formatting style for the selected part on the Structure line.
17 SW_HID_TOX_ENTRY_BUTTON 2d Displays the remainder of the Structure line.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_AUTORIGHT 2d Aligns the tab stop to the right page margin.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_ENTRY 28 Inserts the text of the chapter heading.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3AMF_TABPOS 4a Enter the distance to leave between the left page margin and the tab stop.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_HYPERLINK 1aa Creates a hyperlink for the part of the entry that you enclose by the opening (LS) and the closing (LE) hyperlink tags. On the Structure line, click in the empty box in front of the part that you want to create a hyperlink for, and then click this button. Click in the empty box after the part that you want to hyperlink, and then click this button again. All hyperlinks must be unique. Available only for a table of contents.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_ALPHADELIM 5a Uses the initial letters of the alphabetically arranged index entries as section headings.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_CHAPTERENTRY 4b Select the chapter information that you want to include in the index entry.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ACB_COMMASEPARATED 41 Arranges the index entries on the same line, separated by commas.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_MAIN_ENTRY_STYLE cf Specify the formatting style for the main entries in the alphabetical index. To convert an index entry into a main entry, click in front of the index field in the document and then choose Edit - Index Entry.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_CHAPTERINFO 8e Inserts chapter information, such as the chapter heading and number. Select the information that you want to display in the Chapter entry box.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ANF_LEVEL_OL 59 Enter the maximum hierarchy level down to which objects are shown in the generated index.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN3 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_DOCPOS 5d Sorts the bibliography entries according to the position of their references in the document.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_AUTHINSERT a2 Adds the reference code for the selected bibliography entry to the Structure line. Select an entry in the list, click in an empty box, and then click this button.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_AUTHFIELD 7b To add an entry to the Structure line, click the entry, click in an empty box on the Structure line, and then click Insert.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_THIRDKEY 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN1 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3APB_AUTHREMOVE 3c Removes the selected reference code from the Structure line.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP1 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTCONTENT 73 Sorts the bibliography entries by the Sort keys that you specify, for example, by author or by year of publication.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_FIRSTKEY 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP3 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
31 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTUP2 41 Sorts the bibliography entries in ascending alphanumerical order.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ALB_SECONDKEY 95 Select the entry by which to sort the bibliography entries. This option is only available if you select the Content radio button in the Sort by area.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_TOX_ENTRY%3ARB_SORTDOWN2 44 Sorts the bibliography entries in a descending alphanumerical order.
1d SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_INSTITUTION 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_YEAR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SERIES 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_MONTH 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1c SW_HID_DLG_CREATE_AUTH_ENTRY 2b Change the content of a bibliography entry.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM3 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ANNOTE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITION 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NUMBER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM1 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_BOOKTITLE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PAGES 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_SCHOOL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM2 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_EDITOR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_NOTE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM4 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_JOURNAL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CUSTOM5 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1e SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_HOWPUBLISHED 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ADDRESS 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1c SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_IDENTIFIER 80 Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry.
15 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_URL 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1b SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_PUBLISHER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
16 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ISBN 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHOR 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
19 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_CHAPTER 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1f SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_ORGANIZATIONS 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
18 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_VOLUME 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
20 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_AUTHORITY_TYPE 2d Select the source for the bibliography entry.
17 SW_HID_AUTH_FIELD_TITLE 46 This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography.
1a SW_HID_DLG_CREATE_AUTOMARK 43 Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index.
23 SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_CREATE_ENTRY e4 Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialogue box, in which you can create a new bibliography record. This record is only stored in the document. To add a record to the bibliography database, choose Tools - Bibliography Database.
20 SW_HID_AUTH_MARK_DLG_FROM_DOC_RB 5a Inserts a reference from the bibliography records that are stored in the current document.
19 SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_OK b2 Inserts the bibliographic reference into the document. If you created a new record, you must also insert it as an entry, otherwise the record is lost when you close the document.
1c SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
1f SW_HID_AUTH_MARK_DLG_ID_LISTBOX 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
1d .uno%3AInsertAuthoritiesEntry 21 Inserts a bibliography reference.
21 SW_HID_AUTH_MARK_DLG_FROM_COMP_RB 33 Inserts a reference from the bibliography database.
21 SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_EDIT_ENTRY 68 Opens the Define Bibliography Entry dialogue box in which you can edit the selected bibliography record.
1c SW_HID_INSERT_AUTH_MRK_ENTRY 49 Select the short name of the bibliography record that you want to insert.
12 .uno%3AInsertFrame 5f Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects.
1a .uno%3AInsertFrameInteract 7d Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Click the arrow next to the icon to select the number of columns for the frame.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3AED_ROW 34 Enter the number of rows that you want in the table.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 65 Repeats the heading of the table at the top of subsequent page if the table spans more than one page.
12 .uno%3AInsertTable a8 Inserts a table into the document. You can also click the arrow, drag to select the number of rows and columns to include in the table, and then click in the last cell.
32 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ABT_AUTOFORMAT 59 Opens the AutoFormat dialogue box, in which you can select a predefined layout for table.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 34 Prevents the table from spanning more than one page.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3AED_COL 37 Enter the number of columns that you want in the table.
37 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ANF_REPEAT_HEADER 3f Select the number of rows that you want to use for the heading.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3AED_NAME 1b Enter a name for the table.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_HEADER 24 Includes a heading row in the table.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INSERT_TABLE%3ACB_BORDER 21 Adds a border to the table cells.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CHANGE_DB%3APB_ADDDB 7d Opens a file open dialogue box to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list.
20 sw%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_CHANGE_DB 2e Lists the databases that are currently in use.
1a .uno%3AChangeDatabaseField 31 Change the data sources for the current document.
10 .uno%3AInsertDoc 33 Inserts a text file at the current cursor position.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ARB_EDIT 2e Enter the script code that you want to insert.
27 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3APB_URL 47 Locate the script file that you want to link to, and then click Insert.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ABTN_NEXT 14 Jump to Next Script.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3AED_TYPE 31 Enter the type of script that you want to insert.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ABTN_PREV 18 Jump to Previous Script.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3ARB_URL b1 Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert.
13 .uno%3AInsertScript 4c Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
1f sw%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT 4c Inserts a script at the current cursor position in an HTML or text document.
2b sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3AED_EDIT 2e Enter the script code that you want to insert.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_JAVAEDIT%3AED_URL b1 Adds a link to a script file. Click the URL radio button, and then enter the link in the box. You can also click the browse button (...), locate the file, and then click Insert.
f SW_HID_VS_RULER 8c Select the type of line that you want to insert, and then click OK. The "Plain" type inserts an empty paragraph with a line as lower border.
19 .uno%3AInsertGraphicRuler 39 Inserts a horizontal line at the current cursor position.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageHeader 93 Adds or removes a header from the page style that you select in the sub-menu. The header is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
17 .uno%3AInsertPageFooter 93 Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the sub-menu. The footer is added to all of the pages that use the same page style.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_ORPHANS 88 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Mark this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_BREAKPOSITION 2a Select where you want to insert the break.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_PAGENUM 8b Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current page numbering, select "0".
3f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_HYPHENAFTER 66 Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_PAGECOLL 6c Mark this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_KEEPTOGETHER 6a Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_WIDOWS 96 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Mark this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
40 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_HYPHENBEFORE 63 Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_ORPHANS 88 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Mark this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3AED_MAXHYPH 45 Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_KEEPTOGETHER 51 Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_BREAKTYPE 2e Select the break type that you want to insert.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_PAGEBREAK 49 Mark this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_PAGECOLL 46 Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_EXT 2b Specify hyphenation and pagination options.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_HYPHEN 43 Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EXT_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_WIDOWS 96 Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Mark this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_DISTANCE 63 Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_LINES 98 Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. Shorter paragraphs will not get drop caps.
f SW_HID_DROPCAPS b1 Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. The paragraph must span at least as many lines as you specify in the Lines box.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ABOX_TEMPLATE 44 Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AFLD_DROPCAPS 37 Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3AEDT_TEXT 63 Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ACB_WORD 80 Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DROPCAPS%3ACB_SWITCH 38 Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_NEW_START 3a Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
33 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NUMBER_NEW_START 58 Mark this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph.
26 SW_LISTBOX_TP_NUMPARA_LB_OUTLINE_LEVEL 54 Assigns an outline level from 1 to 10 to the selected paragraphs or Paragraph Style.
34 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_RESTART_PARACOUNT 56 Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter.
2d sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_COUNT_PARA 35 Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ANF_RESTART_PARA 37 Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering
2c sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ACB_NEW_START 30 Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_NUMPARA%3ALB_NUMBER_STYLE 43 Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph.
e SW_HID_NUMPARA a7 Adds or removes outline level, numbering, or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list.
11 .uno%3APageDialog 8e Specify the formatting styles and the layout for the current page style, including page margins, headers and footers, and the page background.
17 .uno%3APageColumnDialog 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
25 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_COLUMN%3ABTN_UP 31 Moves the column display one column to the right.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_HEIGHT 58 Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the height of the column area.
14 .uno%3AFormatColumns 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
13 SW_HID_TABLE_COLUMN 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ACB_BALANCECOLS 93 Distributes the text in multi-column sections. The text flows into all columns to the same height. The height of the section adjusts automatically.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ACB_AUTO_WIDTH 1f Creates columns of equal width.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_1 1e Enter the width of the column.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_COLUMN%3ALB_APPLY_TO 3d Select the item to which you want to apply the column layout.
27 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_COLUMN%3ABTN_DOWN 30 Moves the column display one column to the left.
16 SW_HID_COLUMN_VALUESET 49 Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_2 1e Enter the width of the column.
27 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_DIST1 45 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_NUMBER 49 Enter the number of columns that you want in the page, frame, or section.
23 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_3 1e Enter the width of the column.
d SW_HID_COLUMN 5a Specifies the number of columns and the column layout for a page style, frame, or section.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_POSITION 81 Select the vertical alignment of the separator line. This option is only available if Height value of the line is less than 100%.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_STYLE 6e Select the formatting style for the column separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "None".
27 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_COLUMN%3AED_DIST2 45 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the columns.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINEPOS 61 Select the horizontal alignment for the line that separates the main text from the footnote area.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_DIST 72 Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom page margin and the first line of text in the footnote area.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEDIST 66 Enter the amount of space to leave between the separator line and the first line of the footnote area.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ADLB_LINETYPE 69 Select the formatting style for the separator line. If you do not want a separator line, choose "0.0 pt".
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_MAXHEIGHT 2f Enter the maximum height for the footnote area.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT 57 Sets a maximum height for the footnote area. Enable this option, then enter the height.
14 SW_HID_FOOTNOTE_PAGE 7a Specifies the layout options for footnotes, including the line that separates the footnote from the main body of document.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3AED_LINEWIDTH 4e Enter the length of the separator line as a percentage of the page width area.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTE_PAGE%3ARB_MAXHEIGHT_PAGE 5b Automatically adjusts the height of the footnote area depending on the number of footnotes.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_AT_TXTEND aa Adds footnotes at the end of the section. If the section spans more than one page, the footnotes are added to the bottom of the page on which the footnote anchors appear.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ALB_END_NUMVIEW 2c Select the numbering style for the endnotes.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_END_PREFIX 46 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number
3b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AFLD_FTN_OFFSET 36 Enter the number that you want to assign the footnote.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ALB_FTN_NUMVIEW 2d Select the numbering style for the footnotes.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_NUM_FMT 31 Specifies a custom numbering format for endnotes.
39 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_AT_TXTEND 28 Adds endnotes at the end of the section.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_END_SUFFIX 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number.
3b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AFLD_END_OFFSET 35 Enter the number that you want to assign the endnote.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_FTN_SUFFIX 42 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_NUM 3f Restarts the footnote numbering at the number that you specify.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_FTN_NUM_FMT 32 Specifies a custom numbering format for footnotes.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3AED_FTN_PREFIX 48 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SECTION_FTNENDNOTES%3ACB_END_NUM 3e Restarts the endnote numbering at the number that you specify.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3AMF_TEXTSIZE 55 Enter the maximum base text size. A large value results in fewer characters per line.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_NOGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_PRINT 3b Specifies the printing and colour options of the text grid.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3AMF_RUBYSIZE 26 Enter the font size for the Ruby text.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_DISPLAY 3b Specifies the printing and colour options of the text grid.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ALB_COLOR 3b Specifies the printing and colour options of the text grid.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_CHARSGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ANF_CHARSPERLINE 3f Enter the maximum number of characters that you want on a line.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ANF_LINESPERPAGE 3a Enter the maximum number of lines that you want on a page.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ARB_LINESGRID 4e Adds or removes a text grid for lines or characters to the current page style.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TEXTGRID_PAGE%3ACB_RUBYBELOW 39 Displays Ruby text to the left of or below the base text.
14 .uno%3AGraphicDialog 49 Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected graphic.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_WIDTH 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_FOLLOW b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ADLB_VERTICAL 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_AUTOHEIGHT a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_ASCHAR 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_FOLLOWTEXTFLOW b5 Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOCHAR 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_FIXEDRATIO 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_AUTOWIDTH a6 Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected object.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_AS_CHAR 73 Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_REL_HEIGHT 7f Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the text area of the paragraph it is anchored to.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ADLB_HORIZONTAL 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_HORITO 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOPAGE 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_PARA 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
e SW_HID_FRM_STD 4e Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_VERTTO 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_REL_WIDTH 7d Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the text area of the paragraph it is anchored to.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_AT_CHAR 25 Anchors the selection to a character.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_VERT 34 Select the vertical alignment option for the object.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_KEEPRATIO 55 Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ACB_MIRROR 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_AT_VERT_POS 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ALB_VERT_RELATION 46 Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ARB_ANCHOR_PAGE 2a Anchors the selection to the current page.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ARB_TOPARA 2f Anchors the selection to the current paragraph.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ALB_HORI 36 Select the horizontal alignment option for the object.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ALB_HORI_RELATION 48 Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_WIDTH 36 Enter the width that you want for the selected object.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FRM_STD%3ABT_REALSIZE 47 Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_VERTBY 85 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3ACB_HORIMIRROR 41 Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SWPOSSIZE%3AMF_HORIBY 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_STD%3AED_AT_HORZ_POS 86 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_RIGHT 44 Wraps text on the right side of the object if there is enough space.
e .uno%3AWrapOff 96 Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_ANCHOR_ONLY 3e Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_ONLYOUTSIDE 60 Wraps text only around the contour of the object, but not in open areas within the object shape.
35 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_THROUGH 27 Places the object in front of the text.
33 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_IDEAL ce Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
f .uno%3AWrapMenu 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN 5a Enter the amount of space that you want between the right edge of the object and the text.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_OUTLINE 71 Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
36 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_PARALLEL 3f Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
1d .uno%3AWrapThroughTransparent 71 Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
d .uno%3AWrapOn 3f Wraps text on all four sides of the border frame of the object.
f .uno%3ATextWrap 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
12 .uno%3AWrapThrough 27 Places the object in front of the text.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 58 Enter the amount of space that you want between the top edge of the object and the text.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN 59 Enter the amount of space that you want between the left edge of the object and the text.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ACB_TRANSPARENT 71 Moves the selected object to the background. This option is only available if you selected the Through wrap type.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 5b Enter the amount of space that you want between the bottom edge of the object and the text.
12 .uno%3AWrapContour 71 Wraps text around the shape of the object. This option is not available for the Through wrap type, or for frames.
15 .uno%3AWrapAnchorOnly 3e Starts a new paragraph below the object after you press Enter.
30 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_NO_WRAP 96 Places the object on a separate line in the document. The Text in the document appears above and below the object, but not on the sides of the object.
32 sw%3AImageRadioButton%3ATP_FRM_WRAP%3ARB_WRAP_LEFT 43 Wraps text on the left side of the object if there is enough space.
e SW_HID_FRM_EXT 37 Specify the way you want text to wrap around an object.
10 .uno%3AWrapIdeal ce Automatically wraps text to the left, to the right, or on all four sides of the border frame of the object. If the distance between the object and the page margin is less than 2 cm, the text is not wrapped.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_SELECT 3e Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLY 184 Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click.
17 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_PIPETTE c4 Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same colour. Click here, and then click a colour in the bitmap. To increase the colour range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box.
15 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_APPLY 2b Applies the contour to the selected object.
19 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_WORKPLACE 4b Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_UNDO 19 Reverses the last action.
29 svx%3AFloatingWindow%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR 81 Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object.
14 .uno%3AContourDialog 81 Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object.
16 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_CIRCLE 3b Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYEDIT 5f Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_GRAPHWND 22 Displays a preview of the contour.
18 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYMOVE 4c Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYINSERT 79 Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline.
1a SVX_HID_CONTDLG_POLYDELETE 67 Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_RECT 73 Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_CONTOUR%3AMTF_TOLERANCE 9b Enter the colour tolerance for the Colour Replacer as a percentage. To increase the colour range that the Colour Replacer selects, enter a high percentage.
1b SVX_HID_CONTDLG_AUTOCONTOUR 42 Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit.
14 SVX_HID_CONTDLG_REDO 2d Reverses the action of the last Undo command.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_RIGHT_PAGES 3a Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on odd pages.
24 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ACB_VERT 26 Flips the selected graphic vertically.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_LEFT_PAGES 3b Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on even pages.
15 .uno%3AFlipHorizontal 26 Flips the selected graphic vertically.
e SW_HID_GRF_EXT 3f Specify the flip and the link options for the selected graphic.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3APB_BROWSE 4a Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
23 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ACB_HOR 28 Flips the selected graphic horizontally.
13 .uno%3AFlipVertical 28 Flips the selected graphic horizontally.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3AED_CONNECT 92 Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the browse button (...) and then locate the file that you want to link to.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_GRF_EXT%3ARB_MIRROR_ALL_PAGES 35 Flips the selected graphic horizontally on all pages.
14 CUI_HID_MACRO_MACROS 72 Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign.
1e CUI_HID_MACRO_HEADERTABLISTBOX 2a Lists the events that can trigger a macro.
13 CUI_HID_MACRO_GROUP 3f Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_CLIENT 3c Uses the image map that you created for the selected object.
1f sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_URL%3AED_URL 3a Enter the complete path to the file that you want to open.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_URL%3AED_NAME 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
26 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_SERVER 1d Uses a server-side image map.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_FRM_URL%3APB_SEARCH 49 Locate the file that you want the hyperlink to open, and then click Open.
e SW_HID_FRM_URL 56 Specify the properties of the hyperlink for the selected graphic, frame or OLE object.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_FRM_URL%3ACB_FRAME 47 Specify the name of the frame where you want to open the targeted file.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_PREV f8 Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes before the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the previous link, select a name from the list. If you are linking frames, the current frame and the target frame must be empty.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_SIZE 24 Locks the size of the selected item.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_TEXTFLOW a3 Specifies the preferred text flow direction in a frame. To use the default text flow settings for the page, select Use superordinate object settings from the list.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PRINT_FRAME 37 Includes the selected item when you print the document.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_FRAME 40 Locks the position of the selected item in the current document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_EDIT_IN_READONLY 5d Allows you to edit the contents of a frame in a document that is read-only (write-protected).
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ACB_PROTECT_CONTENT 35 Prevents changes to the content of the selected item.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3AED_NAME 23 Enter a name for the selected item.
e SW_HID_FRM_ADD 3f Specifies properties for the selected object, graphic or frame.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3AED_ALT_NAME 91 Enter the text to display in a web browser when the selected item is unavailable. Alternate text is also used to assist people with disabilities.
23 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FRM_ADD%3ALB_NEXT df Displays the item (object, graphic, or frame) that comes after the current item in a linked sequence. To add or change the next link, select a name from the list. If you are a linking frames, the target frame must be empty.
12 .uno%3AFrameDialog 73 Opens a dialogue box in which you can modify the properties of the selected object, for example, its size and name.
12 .uno%3ATableDialog 7d Specifies the properties of the selected table, for example, name, alignment, spacing, column width, borders, and background.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FULL 49 Extends the table horizontally to the left and to the right page margins.
33 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_BOTTOM_DIST 73 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the bottom edge of the table and the text below the table.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_LEFT 3a Aligns the left edge of the table to the left page margin.
13 SW_HID_FORMAT_TABLE 52 Specify the size, position, spacing, and alignment options for the selected table.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ACB_REL_WIDTH 42 Displays the width of the table as a percentage of the page width.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_RIGHT 3c Aligns the right edge of the table to the right page margin.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_RIGHT_DIST 69 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the right page margin and the edge of the table.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_WIDTH 1d Enter the width of the table.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FREE 71 Horizontally aligns the table based on the values that you enter in the Left and Right boxes in the Spacing area.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_FROM_LEFT 63 Aligns the left edge of the table to the indent that you enter in the Left box in the Spacing area.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_TOP_DIST 70 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the top edge of the table and the text above the table.
31 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_LEFT_DIST 68 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the left page margin and the edge of the table.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3AED_NAME 69 Enter an internal name for the table. You can use this name to quickly locate the table in the Navigator.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ARB_CENTER 2b Centres the table horizontally on the page.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3AED_SPACE 8a Displays the amount of space that is available for adjusting the width of the columns. To set the width of the table, click the Table tab.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACB_MOD_TBL 4f Maintains the current width of the table when you change the width of a column.
2f sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_BTN_UP 44 Displays the table columns found to the right of the current column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_3 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_1 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_2 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_4 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
31 sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_BTN_DOWN 43 Displays the table columns found to the left of the current column.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_6 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACB_PROP 47 Resizes the table width in relation to the column width that you enter.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_TABLE_COLUMN%3ACOL_MF_5 2d Enter the width that you want for the column.
33 sw%3ATriStateBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_SPLIT_ROW 3e Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_PAGEBREAK 61 Mark this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_PAGECOLL 56 Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_BREAKCOLUMN 48 Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page.
38 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ANF_REPEAT_HEADER 33 Enter the number of rows to include in the heading.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_PAGECOLL 56 Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_PAGEBREAKAFTER 2f Inserts a page or column break after the table.
f .uno%3ARowSplit 3e Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_HEADLINE 50 Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_BREAKPAGE 2f Inserts a page break before or after the table.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ARB_PAGEBREAKBEFORE 30 Inserts a page or column break before the table.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_KEEP 4f Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 31 Select the orientation for the text in the cells.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ACB_SPLIT 40 Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table.
15 SW_HID_TABLE_TEXTFLOW 42 Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ANF_PAGENUM 40 Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_TABLE_TEXTFLOW%3ALB_VERTORIENT 3f Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table.
e .uno%3AProtect 40 Prevents the contents of the selected cells from being modified.
19 .uno%3AUnsetCellsReadOnly 48 Removes the cell protection for all selected cells in the current table.
13 .uno%3ASetRowHeight 2a Changes the height of the selected row(s).
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROW_HEIGHT%3ACB_AUTOHEIGHT 48 Automatically adjusts the row height to match the contents of the cells.
2d sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROW_HEIGHT%3AED_HEIGHT 37 Enter the height that you want for the selected row(s).
1a .uno%3ASetOptimalRowHeight 45 Automatically adjusts row heights to match the contents of the cells.
10 .uno%3AEntireRow 29 Selects the row that contains the cursor.
11 .uno%3ADeleteRows 2b Deletes the selected row(s) from the table.
15 .uno%3ASetColumnWidth 2c Changes the width of the selected column(s).
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COL_WIDTH%3AED_WIDTH 39 Enter the width that you want for the selected column(s).
2a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COL_WIDTH%3AED_COL 46 Enter the column number of the column you want to change the width of.
1c .uno%3ASetOptimalColumnWidth 47 Automatically adjusts column widths to match the contents of the cells.
13 .uno%3AEntireColumn 2c Selects the column that contains the cursor.
19 .uno%3AInsertColumnDialog 20 Inserts a column into the table.
16 .uno%3AInsertRowDialog 1d Inserts a row into the table.
14 .uno%3ADeleteColumns 2e Deletes the selected column(s) from the table.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ARID_STYLECATALOG%3ABT_TOOL 38 These are the different categories of formatting styles.
18 SW_HID_COND_COLL_TABLIST c7 Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3ACB_CONDITION 41 Mark this check box to define a new style as a conditional style.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3APB_REMOVE 48 Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3APB_ASSIGN 4a Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONDCOLL%3ALB_STYLE 5f A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box.
10 .uno%3ACharStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for characters.
1a SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_WATERCAN a0 Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style.
15 SFX2_HID_TEMPLATE_FMT 89 Use the Styles and Formatting window to apply, create, edit, add, and remove formatting styles. Double-click an entry to apply the style.
21 SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_UPDATEBYEXAMPLE a5 The manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window.
10 .uno%3AListStyle 3b Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists.
10 .uno%3AParaStyle 2a Displays formatting styles for paragraphs.
10 .uno%3APageStyle 25 Displays formatting styles for pages.
11 .uno%3AFrameStyle 26 Displays formatting styles for frames.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 75 Choose Edit Paragraph Style in the context menu of a paragraph to edit the style of all paragraphs of the same style.
1e SFX2_HID_TEMPLDLG_NEWBYEXAMPLE 59 Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection.
16 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EXEC 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
17 .uno%3AOnlineAutoFormat 95 Automatically formats the document while you type. To set the formatting options, choose Tools - AutoCorrect Options, and then click the Options tab.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_BORDER 33 Includes border styles in the selected table style.
14 SW_HID_AUTOFMT_TABLE 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
2e sw%3AMoreButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_MORE 4d Displays more formatting options for tables. Click again to hide the options.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_ALIGNMENT 38 Includes alignment settings in the selected table style.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_ADD 23 Adds a new table style to the list.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_FONT 35 Includes font formatting in the selected table style.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_PATTERN 37 Includes background styles in the selected table style.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_NUMFORMAT 37 Includes numbering formats in the selected table style.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_RENAME 5b Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style.
11 .uno%3AAutoFormat 5a Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ABTN_REMOVE 21 Deletes the selected table style.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AUTOFMT_TABLE%3ALB_FORMAT 6d Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_OFADLG_PRCNT_SET%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN 61 Enter the minimum length for combining single-lined paragraphs as a percentage of the page width.
16 .uno%3AAutoFormatApply 67 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect Options.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_ACCEPT 26 Applies all of the formatting changes.
18 SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_REJECT 26 Rejects all of the formatting changes.
1a SW_HID_AUTOFORMAT_EDIT_CHG 9a Opens a dialogue box in which you can accept or reject AutoCorrect changes. You can also view the changes made by a specific author or on a specific date.
1d .uno%3AAutoFormatRedlineApply a9 Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect Options. In a dialogue box, you are asked to accept or reject the changes.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_MERGE_STYLE 5e Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_PAGE_STYLE 4b Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document.
2e sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_TEXT_STYLE 62 Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document.
17 SW_HID_LTEMPL_NUMBERING 50 Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document.
2d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_NUM_STYLE 50 Loads the numbering styles from the selected document into the current document.
29 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_REGION 65 Lists the available template categories. Click a category to view its contents in the Templates list.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_TEXT 62 Loads the paragraph and the character styles from the selected document into the current document.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ACB_FRAME_STYLE 4c Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document.
13 SW_HID_LTEMPL_FRAME 4c Loads the frame styles from the selected document into the current document.
2f sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3APB_LOAD_FILE 51 Locate the file containing the styles that you want to load, and then click Open.
16 SW_HID_LTEMPL_OVERRIDE 5e Replaces styles in the current document that have the same name as the styles you are loading.
11 .uno%3ALoadStyles 56 Imports formatting styles from another document or template into the current document.
12 SW_HID_LTEMPL_PAGE 4b Loads the page styles from the selected document into the current document.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_NEW_FILE%3ALB_TEMPLATE 38 Lists the available templates for the selected category.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_BORDER 30 Splits the table without copying the header row.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_BOX_PARA 77 Inserts a blank header row in the second table that is formatted with the style of the first row in the original table.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_BOX_NOPARA 34 Inserts an additional blank row in the second table.
11 .uno%3ASplitTable 49 Splits the current table into two separate tables at the cursor position.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLIT_TABLE%3ARB_CNTNT 52 Includes the first row of the original table as the first row of the second table.
11 .uno%3AMergeTable 8c Combines two consecutive tables into a single table. The tables must be directly next to each other and not separated by an empty paragraph.
11 CUI_HID_HYPHENATE 2d Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_RIGHT 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
3b svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_HYPH_CONTINUE 48 Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate.
39 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_HYPH_DELETE 3e Removes the current hyphenation point from the displayed word.
2b svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3AED_WORD 3d Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_HYPHENATE%3ABTN_LEFT 73 Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed.
10 .uno%3AHyphenate 47 Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line.
14 SW_HID_DLG_WORDCOUNT 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
16 .uno%3AWordCountDialog 6c Counts the words and characters, with or without spaces, in the current selection and in the whole document.
13 SW_HID_OUTLINE_FORM 6a Saves or loads an outline number format. A saved outline number format is available to all text documents.
1a SW_HID_NUM_OUTL_NUM_SAVEAS 99 Opens a dialogue box with which you can save the current settings for the selected outline level. You can then load these settings from another document.
1a SW_HID_NUM_OUTL_NAMED_NUMS 5c Select the predefined numbering style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
1d .uno%3AChapterNumberingDialog 5c Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document.
23 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_NUM_NAMES%3AED_FORM 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_NUM_NAMES%3ALB_FORM 96 Click a numbering style in the list, and then enter a name for the style. The numbers correspond to the outline level that the styles are assigned to.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_CHARFMT 2d Select the format of the numbering character.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3AED_SUFFIX 41 Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ANF_ALL_LEVEL 94 Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_NUMBER 50 Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3AED_PREFIX 42 Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number.
2d sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3AED_START 43 Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_LEVEL 66 Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OUTLINE_NUM%3ALB_COLL 51 Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level.
15 .uno%3AFootnoteDialog 3a Specifies the display settings for footnotes and endnotes.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_TEXT_CHARFMT 5e Select the character style that you want to use for the footnote numbers in the footnote area.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_ANCHR_CHARFMT 67 Select the character style that you want to use for footnote anchors in the text area of your document.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_CONT_FROM c7 Enter the text that you want to display on the page where the footnotes are continued, for example, "Continued from Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the previous page.
17 SW_HID_FOOTNOTE_OPTIONS 34 Specifies the formatting for footnotes and endnotes.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PARA_TEMPL 31 Select the paragraph style for the footnote text.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PAGE_TEMPL 39 Select the page style that you want to use for footnotes.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_NUMVIEW 4a Select the numbering style that you want to use for footnotes or endnotes.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ARB_POS_CHAPTER 3a Displays footnotes at the end of the document as endnotes.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_CONT ca Enter the text that you want to display when the footnotes are continued on the next page, for example, "Continued on Page ". $[officename] Writer automatically inserts the number of the following page.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ARB_POS_PAGE 2d Displays footnotes at the bottom of the page.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_PREFIX 59 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the footnote number in the note text.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3ALB_NUMCOUNT 2e Select the numbering option for the footnotes.
32 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AFLD_OFFSET 8a Enter the number for the first footnote in the document. This option is only available if you selected "Per Document" in the Counting box.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_FOOTNOTEOPTION%3AED_SUFFIX 53 Enter the text that you want to display after the footnote number in the note text.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_NUMVIEW 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_ANCHR_CHARFMT 66 Select the character style that you want to use for endnote anchors in the text area of your document.
2f sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PAGE_TEMPL 38 Select the page style that you want to use for endnotes.
16 SW_HID_ENDNOTE_OPTIONS 26 Specifies the formatting for endnotes.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AED_PREFIX 58 Enter the text that you want to display in front of the endnote number in the note text.
31 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_TEXT_CHARFMT 5c Select the character style that you want to use for the endnote numbers in the endnote area.
2f sw%3AListBox%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3ALB_PARA_TEMPL 30 Select the paragraph style for the endnote text.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AED_SUFFIX 52 Enter the text that you want to display after the endnote number in the note text.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_ENDNOTEOPTION%3AFLD_OFFSET 37 Enter the number for the first endnote in the document.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_BORDER 2f Adds a border to the table and the table cells.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 27 Does not divide the table across pages.
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ANF_REPEAT_HEADER 25 Repeats the first n rows as a header.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_PARA 40 Converts the text to a table using paragraphs as column markers.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_SEMI 45 Converts the text to a table using semi-colons (;) as column markers.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_TAB 3a Converts the text to a table using tabs as column markers.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_HEADER 34 Formats the first row of the new table as a heading.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 3b Repeats the table header on each page that the table spans.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ACB_KEEPCOLUMN 50 Creates columns of equal width, regardless of the position of the column marker.
17 .uno%3AConvertTableText 49 Converts the selected text into a table, or the selected table into text.
31 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ARB_OTHER 5d Converts the text to a table using the character that you type in the box as a column marker.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3ABT_AUTOFORMAT 59 Opens the AutoFormat dialogue box, in which you can select a predefined layout for table.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_CONV_TEXT_TABLE%3AED_OTHER 3b Type the character that you want to use as a column marker.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_UP2 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_UP 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
26 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_DN 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_DN3 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
11 .uno%3ASortDialog 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_DN2 3c Sorts in descending order (for example, 9, 8, 7 or z, y, x).
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_ROW 65 Sorts the rows in the table or the paragraphs in the selection according to the current sort options.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_KEY1 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3APB_DELIM 75 Opens the Special Characters dialogue box, in which you can select the character that you want to use as a separator.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_KEY2 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_KEY2 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
10 .uno%3ATableSort 4a Sorts the selected paragraphs or table rows alphabetically or numerically.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_KEY3 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ADLB_KEY2 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_TABCH 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_TAB 56 If the selected paragraphs correspond to a list separated by tabs, select this option.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_SORTING%3AED_KEY3 51 Enter the number of the table column that you want to use as a basis for sorting.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_KEY1 46 Specifies additional sorting criteria. You can also combine sort keys.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_UP3 3c Sorts in ascending order, (for example, 1, 2, 3 or a, b, c).
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ADLB_KEY3 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ALB_LANG 33 Select the language that defines the sorting rules.
25 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ADLB_KEY1 2f Select the sorting option that you want to use.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_SORTING%3ACB_CASE 7c Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case letters when you sort a table. For Asian languages special handling applies.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_TABCH 4d Enter the character that you want to use as a separator in the selected area.
27 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SORTING%3ARB_COL 45 Sorts the columns in the table according to the current sort options.
13 .uno%3ACalculateSel 47 Calculates the selected formula and copies the result to the clipboard.
11 .uno%3ARepaginate 78 Updates the page formats in the document and recalculates the total number of pages that is displayed on the Status Bar.
14 .uno%3ARemoveTableOf 23 Deletes the current index or table.
13 .uno%3AEditCurIndex 21 Edits the current index or table.
15 .uno%3AUpdateCurIndex 1a Updates the current index.
17 .uno%3AUpdateAllIndexes 98 Update all indexes and tables of contents in the current document. You do not need to place the cursor in an index or table before you use this command.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_NUMBERING_ON 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3AMF_OFFSET 57 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the line numbers and the text.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_COUNT_FRAMELINES 9f Adds line numbers to text in text frames. The numbering restarts in each text frame, and is excluded from the line count in the main text area of the document.
28 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ALB_POS 31 Select where you want the line numbers to appear.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ALB_FORMAT 30 Select the numbering style that you want to use.
1a .uno%3ALineNumberingDialog 2a Adds line numbers to the current document.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_COUNT_EMPTYLINES 2c Includes empty paragraphs in the line count.
2f sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ALB_CHAR_STYLE 46 Select the formatting style that you want to use for the line numbers.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ACB_RESTART_PAGE 40 Restarts line numbering at the top of each page in the document.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3AED_DIVISOR 33 Enter the text that you want to use as a separator.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ANF_DIV_INTERVAL 3a Enter the number of lines to leave between the separators.
36 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LINENUMBERING%3ANF_NUM_INVERVAL 31 Enter the counting interval for the line numbers.
10 .uno%3AUpdateAll 64 Updates all links, fields, indexes, tables of contents, and page formatting in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateFields 3b Updates the contents of all fields in the current document.
15 .uno%3AUpdateAllLinks 2a Updates the links in the current document.
13 .uno%3AUpdateCharts 2b Updates the charts in the current document.
16 .uno%3ADrawGraphicMenu 3f Opens a sub-menu to edit the properties of the selected object.
12 .uno%3AMergeDialog 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
16 .uno%3AMailMergeWizard 5f Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_NEWDOC 38 Creates a new Writer document to use for the mail merge.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3APB_LOADDOC 46 Locate the Writer document that you want too use, and then click Open.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_RECENTDOC 4e Use an existing mail merge document as the base for a new mail merge document.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_LOADDOC 52 Select an existing Writer document to use as the base for the mail merge document.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ALB_RECENTDOC 14 Select the document.
3b sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3APB_BROWSETEMPLATE 2f Opens the Templates and Documents dialogue box.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_CURRENTDOC 49 Uses the current Writer document as the base for the mail merge document.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_DOCSELECT_PAGE%3ARB_LOADTEMPLATE 4a Select the template that you want to create your mail merge document with.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUTTYPE_PAGE%3ARB_MAIL 5c Creates mail merge documents that you can send as an e-mail message or an e-mail attachment.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUTTYPE_PAGE%3ARB_LETTER 28 Creates a printable mail merge document.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_PREVSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ASSIGN 24 Opens the Match Fields dialogue box.
37 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE_CB_HIDE_EMPTY_PARA 2f Enable to leave empty lines out of the address.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3ACB_ADDRESS 31 Adds an address block to the mail merge document.
3b sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_ADDRESSLIST 96 Opens the Select Address List dialogue box, in which you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new address list.
38 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3AIB_NEXTSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
38 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSBLOCK_PAGE%3APB_SETTINGS 2c Opens the Select Address Block dialogue box.
2d SW_PUSHBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_PB_ASSIGN 24 Opens the Match Fields dialogue box.
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_PREVSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
2f SW_IMAGEBUTTON_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_IB_NEXTSET 58 Use the browse buttons to preview the information from the previous or next data record.
31 SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_GREETINGS_PAGE_CB_GREETINGLINE 12 Adds a salutation.
2e sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3APB_DOWN 1a Moves the salutation down.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_TOP 6a Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the page and the top edge of the address block.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_LEFT 6c Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the address block.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ACB_ALIGN 49 Aligns the frame that contains the address block to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3ALB_ZOOM 2c Select a magnification for the page preview.
2c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_LAYOUT_PAGE%3AMF_UP 18 Moves the salutation up.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 5a Minimises the wizard so that you can edit the main mail merge document for all recipients.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_NEXT 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3ACB_EXCLUDE 34 Excludes the current recipient from this mail merge.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_LAST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIRST 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
38 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3AED_RECORD 64 Enter the address record number of a recipient to preview the mail merge document for the recipient.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_PREPAREMERGE_PAGE%3APB_PREV 3d Use the browse buttons to scroll through the address records.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 3c Searches for whole words only and not parts of larger words.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3AED_FIND 68 Enter the text that you want to search for in the merged document, for example, the name of a recipient.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_BACKWARDS 45 Searches from the current cursor position to the top of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3ACB_MATCHCASE 49 Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case characters in the search.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_EDIT 59 Minimises the wizard so that you can edit the mail merge document for a single recipient.
2d sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_MERGE_PAGE%3APB_FIND 1a Click to start the search.
31 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVENOW 14 Saves the documents.
32 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTNOW 20 Prints the mail merge documents.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDDOCUMENTS 1f Click to start sending e-mails.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDMAIL 36 Sends the output as e-mail messages to all recipients.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SENDAS 86 Opens the E-Mail Message dialogue box in which you can enter the e-mail message for the mail merge files that are sent as attachments.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVESTARTDOC 3e Saves the starting document that contains the database fields.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_FROM 77 Selects a range of records starting at the record number in the From box and ending at the record number in the To box.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEINDIVIDUAL cf Saves the merged document as a separate file for each recipient. The file names of the documents are constructed from the name that you enter, followed by an underscore, and the number of the current record.
39 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_PRINTERSETTINGS 1f Changes the printer properties.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_SENDAS 2f Select the mail format for the e-mail messages.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_MAILTO 4c Select the database field that contains the e-mail address of the recipient.
32 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SENDALL 29 Select to send e-mails to all recipients.
30 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_COPYTO 58 Opens the Copy To dialogue box in which you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEMERGEDDOC 1a Saves the merged document.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINT 2d Prints the output for all or some recipients.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ALB_PRINT 13 Select the printer.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_SUBJECT 2f Enter the subject line for the e-mail messages.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_SAVEASONE 2b Saves the merged document as a single file.
33 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ARB_PRINTALL 24 Prints documents for all recipients.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3APB_SAVESTARTDOC 1b Saves the current document.
2e sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3AED_ATTACHMENT 21 Shows the name of the attachment.
2e sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_TO 41 Enter the number of the last record to include in the mail merge.
30 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_OUTPUT_PAGE%3ANF_FROM 42 Enter the number of the first record to include in the mail merge.
22 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_COPYTO%3AED_BCC 4a Enter the recipients of e-mail blind copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
21 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_COPYTO%3AED_CC 44 Enter the recipients of e-mail copies, separated by a semicolon (;).
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_LEFT 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
3a sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_RIGHT 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
40 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_REMOVEFIELD 2f Removes the selected field from the other list.
16 SW_HID_MM_CUSTOMFIELDS 34 Select a field and drag the field to the other list.
3b sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AED_DRAG 3d Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the arrow buttons.
37 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3ACB_FIELD 50 Select a value from the list for the salutation and the punctuation mark fields.
37 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_UP 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_DOWN 46 Select an item in the list and click an arrow button to move the item.
40 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_MM_CUSTOMIZEADDRESSBLOCK%3AIB_INSERTFIELD 73 Adds the selected field from the list of salutation elements to the other list. You can add a field more than once.
2b SW_CHECKBOX_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_CB_GREETINGLINE 20 Adds a salutation to the e-mail.
29 SW_MULTILINEEDIT_DLG_MM_MAILBODY_MLE_BODY 22 Enter the main text of the e-mail.
32 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3AED_COUNTRY 3a Enter the country/region string that shall not be printed.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_ALWAYS 3e Includes country or regional information in the address block.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_NEVER 40 Excludes country or regional information from the address block.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_CUSTOMIZE 61 Opens the New Address Block dialogue box in which you can edit the selected address block layout.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_DELETE 2a Deletes the selected address block layout.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3APB_NEW 5c Opens the New Address Block dialogue box in which you can define a new address block layout.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTADDRESSBLOCK%3ARB_DEPENDENT 86 Only includes country or regional information in the address block if the value differs from the value that you enter in the text box.
19 SW_HID_MM_ADDRESSLIST_TLB 5d Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_CREATELIST 54 Opens the New Address List dialogue box, in which you can create a new address list.
38 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_LOADLIST 5d Select the database file that contains the addresses that you want to use as an address list.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_FILTER 8a Opens the Standard Filter dialogue box, in which you can apply filters to the address list to display the recipients that you want to see.
34 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_EDIT 59 Opens the New Address List dialogue box, in which you can edit the selected address list.
35 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_ADDRESSLISTDIALOG%3APB_TABLE 61 Opens the Select Table dialogue box, in which you can select another table to use for mail merge.
3a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG%3APB_PREVIEW 2d Opens the Mail Merge Recipients dialogue box.
26 SW_HID_MM_SELECTDBTABLEDDIALOG_LISTBOX 3f Select the table that you want to use for mail merge addresses.
17 .uno%3ADefaultNumbering 37 Adds or removes numbering from the selected paragraphs.
12 .uno%3AChainFrames 2b Links the selected frame to the next frame.
13 .uno%3AUnhainFrames 23 Breaks the link between two frames.
11 .uno%3AInsertRows f5 Inserts one or more rows in the table, below the cursor position or selection. You can insert more than one row by opening the corresponding dialogue box (choose Table - Insert - Rows), or by selecting more than one row before clicking the icon.
14 .uno%3AInsertColumns 114 Inserts one or more columns into the table, to the right of the cursor position or selection. You can insert several columns at the same time by opening the corresponding dialogue box (choose Table - Insert - Columns), or by selecting several columns before clicking the icon.
13 .uno%3ATableModeFix 72 If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect only the neighbouring lines or columns in question.
17 .uno%3ATableModeFixProp 52 If this mode is active, changes to the line and/or column affect the entire table.
18 .uno%3ATableModeVariable 55 If this mode is active, changes to a line and/or column affect the size of the table.
e .uno%3AAutoSum 66 Activates the sum function. Note that the cursor must be in the cell where you want the sum to appear.
14 .uno%3ARemoveBullets 4f Turns off numbering or bullets in the current paragraph or selected paragraphs.
19 .uno%3ADecrementSubLevels 30 Shifts paragraphs with subpoints down one level.
19 .uno%3AIncrementSubLevels 38 Shifts paragraphs with subpoints up one numbering level.
1d .uno%3AInsertNeutralParagraph 53 Inserts a paragraph without numbering. The existing numbering will not be affected.
15 .uno%3AMoveUpSubItems 41 Moves a paragraph with subpoints to above the previous paragraph.
17 .uno%3AMoveDownSubItems 47 Moves a paragraph with all its subpoints below the following paragraph.
15 .uno%3ANumberingStart 1c Restarts the text numbering.
16 .uno%3AStatePageNumber 110 The current page number is displayed in this field of the status bar. A double-click opens the Navigator, with which you can navigate in the document. A right-click shows all bookmarks in the document. Click a bookmark to position the text cursor at the bookmark location.
14 .uno%3AStatusBarFunc 37 Displays current information about the active document.
f .uno%3AZoomPlus 30 Zooms in to get a close-up view of the document.
10 .uno%3AZoomMinus 38 Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size.
d .uno%3AZoomIn 38 Zooms out to see more of the document at a reduced size.
14 SW_HID_PVIEW_ZOOM_LB 2e Determines the zoom level of the page preview.
13 .uno%3AShowTwoPages 2e Displays two pages in the Page Preview window.
12 .uno%3APreviewZoom b2 Defines the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a grid to select the number of pages to be displayed as rows and columns in the preview.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_ZOOM%3AED_COL 2d Defines the number of pages shown in columns.
31 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_ZOOM%3AED_ROW 24 Defines the number of rows of pages.
18 .uno%3AShowMultiplePages b2 Defines the number of pages displayed on screen. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a grid to select the number of pages to be displayed as rows and columns in the preview.
13 .uno%3AShowBookview 47 Select to display the first page on the right side in the page preview.
3d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PORTRAIT 23 Prints the page in portrait format.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_RMARGIN 21 Specifies the right margin width.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_HMARGIN 3a Determines the horizontal distance between document pages.
1a .uno%3APreviewPrintOptions 52 Opens a dialogue box where settings for the printout of your document can be made.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_BMARGIN 23 Specifies the bottom margin height.
18 FN_PREVIEW_PRINT_OPTIONS 52 Opens a dialogue box where settings for the printout of your document can be made.
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_ROWS 4a Defines the number of rows of pages (horizontally stacked document pages).
3a sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_COLS 4f Defines the number of pages shown in columns (vertically tiled document pages).
3e sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 24 Prints the page in landscape format.
3c sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3APB_STANDARD a6 Specifies that the system will not use a fixed number of rows and columns when printing out the page view, but rather uses what was originally shown in the page view.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_LMARGIN 20 Specifies the left margin width.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_TMARGIN 20 Specifies the top margin height.
3c sw%3AMetricField%3ADLG_PAGEPREVIEW_PRINTOPTIONS%3AMF_VMARGIN 38 Determines the vertical distance between document pages.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_AND 29 Tests for values matching the Boolean AND
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SIN 1e Calculates the sine in radians
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NOT 29 Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SQRT 1b Calculates the square root.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GEQ 3b Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MAX 32 Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list.
16 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LISTSEP 21 Separates the elements in a list.
11 SW_HID_MN_POP_OPS 31 You can insert various operators in your formula.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_NEQ 2d Tests for inequality between selected values.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_GRE 2f Tests for values greater than a specified value
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LES 2c Tests for values less than a specified value
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_PHD 17 Calculates a percentage
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_TAN 22 Calculates the tangent in radians.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MEAN 42 Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list.
12 SW_HID_MN_POP_FUNC 3a You can choose from the following trigonometric functions:
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_LEQ 39 Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ASIN 23 Calculates the arc sine in radians.
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ACOS 25 Calculates the arc cosine in radians.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_SUM 29 Calculates the sum of the selected cells.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_MIN 32 Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list.
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_OR 28 Tests for values matching the Boolean OR
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_XOR 32 Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR
11 SW_HID_MN_CALC_EQ 24 Checks if selected values are equal.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_COS 21 Calculates the cosine in radians.
12 SW_HID_MN_CALC_POW 21 Calculates the power of a number.
17 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CALC 4f Opens a sub-menu, from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table.
14 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ROUND 30 Rounds a number to the specified decimal places.
18 SW_HID_MN_POP_STATISTICS 38 You can choose from the following statistical functions:
13 SW_HID_MN_CALC_ATAN 26 Calculates the arc tangent in radians.
19 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_CANCEL 41 Clears the contents of the input line and closes the formula bar.
18 SW_HID_TBX_FORMULA_APPLY ab Transfers the contents of the input line into your document and closes the formula bar. The contents of the input line are inserted at the cursor position in the document.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_FORMULA 8d Allows you to create a formula by typing it directly into the input line or by clicking the Formula icon to display the formulae in sub-menu.
12 SW_HID_INSERT_CTRL 61 The toolbar contains various functions for inserting frames, graphics, tables, and other objects.
11 .uno%3AInsertCtrl 61 The toolbar contains various functions for inserting frames, graphics, tables, and other objects.
16 .uno%3AInsertFieldCtrl 5b Click to open the Fields dialogue box. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a sub-menu.
15 HID_INSERT_FIELD_CTRL 5b Click to open the Fields dialogue box. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a sub-menu.
16 .uno%3AInsertDateField 24 Inserts the current date as a field.
16 .uno%3AInsertTimeField 24 Inserts the current time as a field.
1c .uno%3AInsertPageNumberField 42 Inserts the current page number as a field at the cursor position.
1b .uno%3AInsertPageCountField 3d Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document.
17 .uno%3AInsertTopicField 45 Inserts the subject specified in the document properties as a field .
17 .uno%3AInsertTitleField 42 Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field.
18 .uno%3AInsertAuthorField 48 Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field.
e .uno%3AGraphic 79 If the Graphics On/Off icon on the Tools bar is activated, no graphics are displayed - only empty frames as placeholders.
13 .uno%3AShadowCursor 2b Activates or deactivates the direct cursor.
f .uno%3AFileMenu 5c These commands apply to the current document, open a new document, or close the application.
f .uno%3AEditMenu 4d This menu contains commands for editing the contents of the current document.
f .uno%3AViewMenu 52 This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMenu be The Insert menu contains commands for inserting new elements in your document. This includes sections, footnotes, comments, special characters, graphics, and objects from other applications.
11 .uno%3AFormatMenu 4e Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document.
10 .uno%3AToolsMenu 9c Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences.
11 .uno%3AWindowList 43 Contains commands for manipulating and displaying document windows.
19 .uno%3AConvertTableToText 4a Opens a dialogue box with which you can convert the current table to text.
19 .uno%3AConvertTextToTable 4d Opens a dialogue box with which you can convert the selected text to a table.
10 .uno%3ATableMenu 4a Shows commands to insert, edit, and delete a table inside a text document.
18 .uno%3AHeadingRowsRepeat 53 Repeats the table headers on subsequent pages if the table spans one or more pages.
12 .uno%3ADeleteTable 1a Deletes the current table.
12 .uno%3ASelectTable 1a Selects the current table.
11 .uno%3AEntireCell 19 Selects the current cell.
16 .uno%3AParaRightToLeft 53 The text formatted in a complex text layout language is entered from right to left.
10 HID_TEXT_TOOLBOX 3e The Formatting bar contains several text formatting functions.
d .uno%3AShrink 2b Reduces the font size of the selected text.
b .uno%3AGrow 2d Increases the font size of the selected text.
16 .uno%3AParaLeftToRight 27 The text is entered from left to right.
12 HID_GRAFIK_TOOLBOX 5b The Picture Bar contains functions for formatting and positioning selected bitmap graphics.
11 HID_TABLE_TOOLBOX 75 The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table.
10 HID_DRAW_TOOLBOX 125 You can see the Drawing Object Properties bar in Writer and Calc. Select the menu View - Toolbars - Drawing Object Properties. The controls are enabled when a drawing object is selected. You see some different icons by default, whether the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet.
f HID_NUM_TOOLBOX b4 The Bullets and Numbering bar contains functions to modify the structure of numbered paragraphs, including changing the order of paragraphs and defining different paragraph levels.
11 .uno%3AZoomSlider 7f Drag the Zoom slider to the left to show more pages, drag to the right to zoom into a page and show a smaller area of the page.
15 .uno%3ALanguageStatus 181 Displays the language for the selected text. Click to open a menu from which you can choose another language for the selected text or for the current paragraph. Choose None to exclude the text from spell checking and hyphenation. Choose Reset to Default Language to re-apply the default language for the selection or the paragraph. Choose More to open a dialogue box with more options.
11 .uno%3AViewLayout 92 The View Layout icons show from left to right: Single column mode. View mode with pages side by side. Book mode with two pages as in an open book.
14 .uno%3AInsertFormula 52 The Formula Bar allows you to create and insert calculations into a text document.
11 HID_FRAME_TOOLBOX 77 When a frame is selected, the Frame Bar provides the most important functions for formatting and positioning the frame.
f HID_OLE_TOOLBOX 87 The OLE Object bar appears when objects are selected, and contains the most important functions for formatting and positioning objects.
15 HID_DRAW_TEXT_TOOLBOX 49 Contains formatting commands for text that is contained in a draw object.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
2c starmath%3APushButton%3ARID_SYMBOLDIALOG%3A2 49 Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialogue box.
1c SFX2_HID_TABDLG_STANDARD_BTN 56 Resets the values visible in the dialogue box back to the default installation values.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_ROWCELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ARB_COPY_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_CUSTOMSHOW%3ABTN_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
2c sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_COPY%3ABTN_SET_DEFAULT 56 Resets the values visible in the dialogue box back to the default installation values.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATCOL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFADLG_OPTIONS_TREE%3APB_BACK 40 Resets modified values back to the $[officename] default values.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_PREVIOUS 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDPREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
17 DBACCESS_HID_DBWIZ_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_PRINTAREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
2e sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ARB_ASSIGN 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CREATE 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELABBREV 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1b CUI_HID_MEASURE_CTL_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
2e sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_NAMES%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
31 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AREAS%3ARB_REPEATROW 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_2 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
2a sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_BIB_BASE%3APB_DELETE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_STD_FONT%3APB_STANDARD 56 Resets the values visible in the dialogue box back to the default installation values.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDNEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_1 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_FORMULACELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_NEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_AUTOFORMAT%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
3b sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SPEC_FILTER%3ARB_CRITERIA_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
15 SW_HID_MD_GLOS_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDPREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
19 SFX2_HID_TABDLG_RESET_BTN a3 Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialogue box was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialogue box.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_2 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
43 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DEST_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_DELDOUBLECAPS 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
2f sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_COLCELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_PREVIOUS 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_PREVIOUS 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DEL 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
13 WIZARDS_HID0_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_CANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ABTN_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
17 SVX_HID_GALLERY_PREVIEW 2c Displays a preview of the current selection.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_TABOP%3ARB_FORMULARANGE 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_0_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
1c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BACK 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SOLVER%3ARB_VARCELL 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
30 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_DBNAMES%3ARB_DBAREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDCANCEL 46 Clicking Cancel closes a dialogue box without saving any changes made.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_DATA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
33 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_REMOVE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND1_1 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONSOLIDATE%3ARB_DATA_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
37 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLROWNAMERANGES%3ARB_AREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDFINISH 2a Applies all changes and closes the wizard.
36 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_PIVOT_LAYOUT%3ARB_OUTAREA 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND2_2 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
34 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONDFORMAT%3ARB_COND3_1 105 Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialogue box to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Maximise icon. Click it to restore the dialogue box to its original size.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_DELETE 3c Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation.
11 WIZARDS_HID0_PREV 69 View the selections in the dialogue box made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_DEL_MULTIPATH 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNEXT a4 Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialogue box settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create.
1d SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_BACKGROUND 35 Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic.
19 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_PASTE 46 Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document.
1a SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_RENAME 28 Enables a selected object to be renamed.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_OBJECT 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
1f SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN_FOLDER 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_COPY 2d Copies the selected element to the clipboard.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ACTUALIZE 39 Updates the view in the window or in the selected object.
18 SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_OPEN 3f Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task.
1b SID_EXPLORERCONTENT_DESTROY 99 Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a security query appears before objects are deleted.
1c SFX2_HID_DID_SAVE_PACKED_XML 50 By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format.
11 .uno%3AActiveHelp 53 Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer.
e .uno%3AHelpTip 4f Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents.
13 .uno%3AHelperDialog 9f Allows you to activate the automatic Help Agent. You can also activate the Help Agent through $[officename] - General - Help Agent in the Options dialogue box.
2f svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_COLOR_DEPTH 43 Select the colour depth from 8 bit greyscale or 24 bit true colour.
34 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ANF_COMPRESSION df Sets the compression and quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with smallest file size, up to a high quality and largest file size. A high compression means a low quality, a low compression means a high quality.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ANF_RESOLUTION 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
2e svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_RESOLUTION 4b Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box.
2d svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3AMF_SIZEX 14 Specifies the width.
3c svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COMPRESSION_NONE 32 Specifies that you do not wish to use compression.
2f svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_INTERLACED 40 Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_SAVE_TRANSPARENCY bc Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Colour Replacer to set the transparent colour in the picture.
2e svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_BINARY 52 Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file.
32 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_LEVEL2 74 Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports coloured bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics.
39 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COLOR_FORMAT1 1b Exports the file in colour.
29 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ALB_SIZEX 20 Specifies the measurement units.
2d svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_EXPORT%3AMF_SIZEY 15 Specifies the height.
3b svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COMPRESSION_LZW 66 LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm.
35 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_EPS_PREVIEW_EPSI b6 Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code.
2c svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_TEXT 57 Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file.
35 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_EPS_PREVIEW_TIFF 6a Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file.
31 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ACB_RLE_ENCODING 36 Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics.
39 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_COLOR_FORMAT2 24 Exports the file in greyscale tones.
32 svtools%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_EXPORT%3ARB_EPS_LEVEL1 8c Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ALB_FONT 41 Select the character set from the options used for import/export.
31 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_FIELDSEP 41 Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_FIXEDWIDTH 2b Exports all data fields with a fixed width.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_SAVESHOWN bd Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this check box is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ACB_QUOTEALL c0 Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character.
30 sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3AED_TEXTSEP 44 Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_IMPORTOPT%3ADDLB_FONT 2c Specifies the character set for text export.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CHARSET 3c Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_ASONCE 3e Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields.
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_QUOTED_AS_TEXT b2 When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text.
29 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_TYPE1 5f Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_COMMA 30 Separates data delimited by commas into columns.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ALB_CUSTOMLANG 2f Determines how the number strings are imported.
2c sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_TEXTSEP 5c Select a character to delimit text data. You can can also enter a character in the text box.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SPACE 30 Separates data delimited by spaces into columns.
2d sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_FIXED 45 Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns.
2f sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ANF_AT_ROW 35 Specifies the row where you want to start the import.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_OTHER 88 Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data.
3a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACB_DETECT_SPECIAL_NUMBER 9e When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ARB_SEPARATED 27 Select the separator used in your data.
29 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_TAB 2e Separates data delimited by tabs into columns.
22 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII 2b Sets the import options for delimited data.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3ACKB_SEMICOLON 34 Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns.
26 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCDLG_ASCII%3AED_OTHER 88 Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_SCALE 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
25 sd%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS 6a The Warning Print Options dialogue box appears when the page setup does not match the defined print range.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_CUT 72 Specifies that anything extending beyond the maximum print range will be cut off and not included in the printing.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PRINT_WARNINGS%3ARBT_POSTER 3f Specifies whether to distribute the printout on multiple pages.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_LF 2d Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break.
2d sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_LANGUAGE 78 Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_FONT 93 By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CRLF 4a Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ALB_CHARSET 3d Specifies the character set of the file for export or import.
2b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASCII_FILTER%3ARB_CR 34 Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break.
1b SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD_LINK 27 Inserts the selected graphic as a link.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADD 49 Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_DELETE 30 Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_ADDMENU 42 Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document.
15 SVX_HID_GALLERY_TITLE 2d Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object.
1a SVX_HID_GALLERY_MN_PREVIEW 32 The Preview command displays the selected graphic.
1d SW_HID_MN_READONLY_GRAPHICOFF 32 Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_LOADGRAPHIC 64 If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible.
1b SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYLINK 36 Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard.
21 SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEBACKGROUND 30 Allows you to save the background of a Web page.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_SAVEGRAPHIC 43 Opens a dialogue box with which you can save the selected graphics.
1c SW_HID_MN_READONLY_PLUGINOFF 1b Disables inserted plug-ins.
1e SW_HID_MN_READONLY_COPYGRAPHIC 2b Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard.
22 CUI_HID_GALLERY_PROPERTIES_GENERAL 1f Displays the name of the theme.
10 .uno%3AAddDirect 25 Creates a new $[officename] document.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fscalc 38 Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fsimpress%3Fslot=6686 6e Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). The Presentation Wizard dialogue box will appear.
21 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2Fweb 1c Creates a new HTML document.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21052 9c Opens the Business Cards dialogue box in which you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer).
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21051 9b Opens the Labels dialogue box in which you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer).
2c private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%2FGlobalDocument 1e Creates a new master document.
28 private%3Afactory%2Fswriter%3Fslot=21053 1e Creates a new XForms document.
1b private%3Afactory%2Fswriter 33 Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer).
2b private%3Afactory%2Fsdatabase%3FInteractive 34 Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsdraw 34 Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw).
1b SFX2_HID_TBXCONTROL_FILENEW 52 Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type.
2f service%3Acom.sun.star.sdb.DatabaseWizardDialog 34 Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file.
d .uno%3ANewDoc 57 If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates and Documents.
19 private%3Afactory%2Fsmath 34 Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math).
b slot%3A5500 4d Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_DOCINFO 3e Displays the properties for the selected template or document.
1e SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREVIEW 38 Allows you to preview the selected template or document.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PRINT 29 Prints the selected template or document.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_PREV 28 Moves up one folder level, if available.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_FILEVIEW c7 Lists the available templates or documents for the selected category. Select a template or document and, then click Open. To preview the document, click the Preview button above the box on the right.
3d svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_ICONCTRL b3 Categories are shown in the box on the left side of the Templates and Documents dialogue box. Click a category to display the files associated with that category in the Title box.
3f svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCTEMPLATE%3ABTN_DOCTEMPLATE_MANAGE 3b Adds, removes, or rearranges templates or sample documents.
1b SVT_HID_TEMPLATEDLG_TB_BACK 36 Moves back to the previous window in the dialogue box.
13 .uno%3AInsertLabels 43 Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document.
13 SW_HID_LABEL_INSERT 23 Creates a new document for editing.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_TYPE eb Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
2d sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3AEDT_WRITING 5a Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field.
25 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_ADDR 66 Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DATABASE 4b Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABOX_MAKE 2f Select the brand of paper that you want to use.
26 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_DBFIELD 86 Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box.
29 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_SHEET 23 Prints labels on individual sheets.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_CONT 22 Prints labels on continuous paper.
2a sw%3AImageButton%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ABTN_INSERT 86 Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box.
e SW_HID_LAB_LAB 3f Specify the label text and choose the paper size for the label.
24 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_LAB_LAB%3ALB_TABLE 55 Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label.
28 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_LEFT a3 Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
28 sw%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3ACB_MAKE 22 Enter or select the desired brand.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3APB_SAVE 30 Saves the current label or business card format.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_WIDTH 6f Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_LABEL%3AED_TYPE 1d Enter or select a label type.
e SW_HID_LAB_FMT 1d Set paper formatting options.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_UPPER 98 Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_VDIST c8 Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
2a sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HEIGHT 6c Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
2c sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_COLUMNS 59 Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page.
29 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_HDIST 8b Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here.
29 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_FMT%3AFLD_ROWS 5a Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_COL 59 Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page.
28 sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3AFLD_ROW 58 Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page.
2a sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_SINGLE 31 Prints a single label or business card on a page.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ACB_SYNCHRON af Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronise Labels button.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_SYNC_BTN%3ABTN_SYNC 71 Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page.
28 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PAGE 30 Creates a full page of labels or business cards.
2b sw%3APushButton%3ATP_LAB_PRT%3ABTN_PRTSETUP 25 Opens the Printer Setup dialogue box.
e SW_HID_LAB_PRT 6f Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronisation and printer settings.
19 .uno%3AInsertBusinessCard 2a Design and create your own business cards.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_CONT 2a Prints business cards on continuous paper.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_SHEET 2b Prints business cards on individual sheets.
1d SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_TYPE dd Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format.
1e SW_HID_BUSINESS_FMT_PAGE_BRAND 2f Select the brand of paper that you want to use.
1c SW_HID_BUSINESS_CARD_CONTENT 67 Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list.
35 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_VISITING_CARDS%3ALB_AUTO_TEXT_GROUP 4d Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PROFESSION 23 Enter the title of your profession.
2b sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT_2 4b Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME_2 4a Enter the surname of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_PHONE 21 Enter your home telephone number.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STATE 30 Enter the name of the country in which you live.
2c sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME_2 4b Enter the forename of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_WWW 2c Enter the address of your Internet homepage.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_WWW 36 Enter the address of your company's Internet homepage.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MOBILE 23 Enter your mobile telephone number.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_SLOGAN 21 Enter the slogan of your company.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP_EXT 21 Enter additional company details.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_PHONE 25 Enter your business telephone number.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STATE 3d Enter the name of the country where your business is located.
49 fpicker%3AImageButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 18 Creates a new directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_ALL 23 Click to delete all selected files.
1b SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_INSERT_BTN 4b Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position.
18 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_VERSION 5e If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open.
19 SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_READONLY 21 Opens the file in read-only mode.
47 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_STANDARD 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_RENAME 3f To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename.
41 fpicker%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_FOLDER_FILENAME 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
43 fpicker%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_EXPLORERFILE%3ALB_EXPLORERFILE_FILETYPE 7b Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory.
34 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_YES 42 Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialogue box.
23 FPICKER_HID_FILEDLG_AUTOCOMPLETEBOX 7a Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https.
b .uno%3AOpen 18 Opens or imports a file.
1c SVT_HID_FILEVIEW_MENU_DELETE 3f To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_STANDARD 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
33 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_QUERYDELETE%3ABTN_NO 4e Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialogue box.
18 SVT_HID_EXPLORERDLG_FILE 18 Opens or imports a file.
19 SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_BTN 1b Selects the indicated path.
1e SFX2_HID_FILEDLG_PATH_FILENAME 27 Enter or select the path from the list.
2e uui%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTER_SELECT%3ALB_FILTERS 3c Select the import filter for the file that you want to open.
f .uno%3ACloseDoc 38 Closes the current document without exiting the program.
b .uno%3ASave 1b Saves the current document.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILETYPE 3c Select the file format for the document that you are saving.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DEFAULTDIRECTORY 31 Displays the files in the default user directory.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DOSAVE f Saves the file.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEURL 42 Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL
1a SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SELECTION 9f Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this check box is not marked, the entire document is exported.
18 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_LEVELUP 61 Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CUSTOMIZEFILTER 4e Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.
21 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_SAVEWITHPASSWORD 57 Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file.
d .uno%3ASaveAs 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
d SID_SAVEASDOC 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
17 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_DIALOG 5f Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type.
20 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_CREATEDIRECTORY 18 Creates a new directory.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_FILEVIEW 44 Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in.
f .uno%3AExportTo 5b Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify.
1c .uno%3ASetDocumentProperties 78 Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_THEMA 61 Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_TITLE 1f Enter a title for the document.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_KEYWORDS ad Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons.
32 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODESC%3AED_COMMENT 2d Enter comments to help identify the document.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODESC 34 Contains descriptive information about the document.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_DELETE a3 Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted.
2a sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3AED_FILE_NAME 17 Displays the file name.
31 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ACB_USE_USERDATA 92 Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.
13 SFX2_HID_DOCINFODOC 32 Contains basic information about the current file.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_CUSTOMPROPERTIES%3ABTN_ADD 2e Click to add a new row to the Properties list.
1e SFX2_HID_CTRL_CUSTOMPROPERTIES ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO1 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
14 SFX2_HID_DOCINFOUSER 40 Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO4 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO3 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFOUSER%3AED_INFO2 ad Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats.
f SW_HID_DOC_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
1e sc%3ATabPage%3ARID_SCPAGE_STAT 29 Displays statistics for the current file.
16 SFX2_HID_DOCINFORELOAD 37 Sets the refresh and redirect options for an HTML page.
32 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_RELOAD 40 Enter the number of seconds to wait before the page is reloaded.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3APB_BROWSEURL 3b Locate the file that you want to open, and then click Open.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_NOAUTOUPDATE 24 User must refresh the page manually.
38 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_FORWARDUPDATE 5c Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box.
27 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_URL 38 Enter the URL address of the file that you want to open.
33 sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3AED_FORWARD 57 Enter the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the browser to a different file.
2d sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ACB_FRAME 6f If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded.
37 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_DOCINFORELOAD%3ARB_RELOADUPDATE 87 Reloads the HTML page after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. To observe the result, open the page in a browser.
28 HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2a HID_SECURITYTAB_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
1f SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_PROTECTION d7 Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection.
22 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
30 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
3a HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 16 Re-enter the password.
23 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_RECORD_CHANGES 50 Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Changes - Record.
38 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_CONFIRM_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 16 Re-enter the password.
2d HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
20 HID_SECURITYTAB_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
32 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_PASSWORD_TO_MODIFY 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
27 SFX2_HID_SECURITYTAB_OPEN_FILE_READONLY 42 Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only.
13 .uno%3ATemplateMenu 5a Lets you organise and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template.
17 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINT 47 Prints the name and properties of the styles that are used in the file.
1f SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_PRINTER_SETUP 3f Changes the printer and its settings for the selected document.
2b sfx2%3AMenuButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_EDIT 48 Contains commands for managing and editing your templates and documents.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_DELETE 1e Deletes the current selection.
1b SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_FROM 98 Imports an additional template. To import a template, select a template folder from the list, click the Command button, and then select Import template.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_FILES 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
19 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_COPY_TO 1e Exports the selected template.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_LEFT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
1b SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_LEFT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
15 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_NEW 20 Creates a new template category.
2c sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ALB_RIGHT_TYP 5a Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_DEL 5c Select a $[officename] document type to reset the default template to the original template.
16 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
1c SFX2_HID_CTL_ORGANIZER_RIGHT 9d Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below.
10 .uno%3AOrganizer 6c Opens the Template Management dialogue box in which you can organise templates and define default templates.
36 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_ORGANIZE%3ABTN_ADDRESSTEMPLATE 4d Locate a file that you want to add to the document list, and then click Open.
18 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_RESCAN 22 Updates the contents of the lists.
21 SFX2_HID_ORGANIZE_STDTEMPLATE_ADD 71 Uses the selected template as the default template when you create a new $[officename] document of the same type.
22 SVT_HID_ADDRTEMPL_FIELD_ASSIGNMENT 4e Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry.
35 svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_TABLE 2c Select the data table for your address book.
49 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3APB_ADMINISTATE_DATASOURCES 36 Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list.
3a svtools%3AComboBox%3ADLG_ADDRESSBOOKSOURCE%3ACB_DATASOURCE 2d Select the data source for your address book.
18 .uno%3AAddressBookSource 45 Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_EDIT 28 Opens the selected template for editing.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3AED_NAME 1e Enter a name for the template.
15 .uno%3ASaveAsTemplate 29 Saves the current document as a template.
2e sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_SECTION 34 Select a category in which to save the new template.
32 sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ABT_ORGANIZE 5d Opens the Template Management dialogue box in which you can organise or create new templates.
32 sfx2%3AListBox%3ADLG_DOC_TEMPLATE%3ALB_STYLESHEETS 28 Lists the available template categories.
13 .uno%3AOpenTemplate 44 Opens a dialogue box in which you can select a template for editing.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3AProperties 70 Opens the printer properties dialogue box. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPage%3AListBox 29 Select how many slides to print per page.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintDateTime%3ACheckBox 35 Specifies whether to print the current date and time.
33 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3APrinterList f9 The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. Click the Printer details button to see some information about the selected printer. Click the Properties button to change some of the printer properties.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintHidden%3ACheckBox 3f Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3ASingleJobs 68 Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A2 46 Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document.
3a .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ASlidesPerPageOrder%3AListBox 32 Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A1 42 Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A1 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ARowsBox 16 Select number of rows.
20 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOK 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectInclude%3AListBox 2a Select which pages of a brochure to print.
30 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AOrderBox 2e Select order in which pages are to be printed.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A2 2e Specifies to print colours as black and white.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ACopies 32 Enter the number of copies that you want to print.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APageMarginBox 3e Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A0 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
35 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APagesPerSheet 28 Print multiple pages per sheet of paper.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ABorder%3ACheckBox 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 7c Specifies whether to print colours and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background).
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPaperFromSetup%3ACheckBox 86 For printers with multiple trays this option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 78 Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspect%3ACheckBox 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsPrintName%3ACheckBox 37 Specifies whether to print the page name of a document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A3 a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
c HID_PRINTDLG 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
2f .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ACollate 32 Preserves the page order of the original document.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 182 If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AColumnsBox 19 Select number of columns.
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AIsIncludeEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 53 If checked, empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed.
40 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 5d Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ABorderBox 28 Check to draw a border around each page.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A0 2c Specify how to scale slides in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3APagesPerSheetBox 32 Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A1 28 Specifies to print colours as greyscale.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageRange%3AEdit c3 To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A1 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ATitleRow%3ACheckBox 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3AOrientationBox 24 Select the orientation of the paper.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AQuality%3ARadioButton%3A0 27 Specifies to print in original colours.
c .uno%3APrint 83 Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageOptions%3ARadioButton%3A2 83 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
3c .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintContent%3ARadioButton%3A0 1b Prints the entire document.
31 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3AToReverse 26 Check to print pages in reverse order.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintScale%3ANumericField 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
3d .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AFixedText 29 Specify where to print comments (if any).
34 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AFormulaText%3ACheckBox 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintFormat%3ARadioButton%3A2 4a Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintProspectRTL%3AListBox 5e For brochure printing, you can select a left-to-right order of pages or a right-to-left order.
36 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3ANUpPage%3ASheetMarginBox 37 Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge.
2e .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AOptPage%3AToFile 29 Prints to a file instead of to a printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintLeftRightPages%3AListBox 2d Specify which pages to include in the output.
32 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3AJobPage%3ADetailsBtn 37 Show/Hide detailed information of the selected printer.
37 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APageContentType%3AListBox 35 Select which parts of the document should be printed.
32 svtools%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
13 .uno%3APrinterSetup 34 Select the default printer for the current document.
39 svtools%3AListBox%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ALB_NAMES 7a Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list.
42 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_SVT_PRNDLG_PRNSETUPDLG%3ABTN_PROPERTIES 4f Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document.
16 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsMS 80 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used.
11 .uno%3ASendToMenu 3f Sends a copy of the current document to different applications.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsOOo 83 Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used.
f .uno%3ASendMail 7e Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_CONTROL_FILEVIEW 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
13 .uno%3ANewGlobalDoc b1 Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document.
28 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_LISTBOX_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
19 SVT_HID_FILESAVE_TEMPLATE 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
24 SW_HID_SEND_MASTER_CTRL_EDIT_FILEURL 74 Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents.
b .uno%3AQuit 47 Closes all $[officename] programs and prompts you to save your changes.
e .uno%3ASaveAll 2b Saves all modified $[officename] documents.
14 .uno%3AVersionDialog 89 Saves and organises multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete, and compare previous versions.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_DELETE 1d Deletes the selected version.
21 sfx2%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_VERSIONS 85 Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_OPEN 31 Opens the selected version in a read-only window.
2d sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_COMPARE 33 Compare the changes that were made in each version.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_COMMENTS%3AME_VERSIONS 83 Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialogue box, you cannot edit the comment.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3ACB_SAVEONCLOSE 77 If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_SAVE ae Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialogue box before you save the new version.
2a sfx2%3APushButton%3ADLG_VERSIONS%3APB_VIEW 35 Displays the entire comment for the selected version.
15 .uno%3ARecentFileList 53 Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file from the list, click its name.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_UNDO a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3AUndo a1 Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar.
b .uno%3ARedo 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_REDO 9a Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.
d .uno%3ARepeat 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
13 .uno%3ARepeatAction 47 Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc.
a .uno%3ACut 32 Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard.
b .uno%3ACopy 26 Copies the selection to the clipboard.
c .uno%3APaste 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
17 SC_HID_SC_REPLCELLSWARN 6f Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.
15 .uno%3AInsertContents 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNOTES 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSOBJECTS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_DOWN 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_DIV 0 
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSATTRS 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSDATETIME 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSSTRINGS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_NONE 0 
13 .uno%3APasteSpecial 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_SKIP_EMPTY 0 
11 CUI_HID_PASTE_DLG 2e Displays the source of the clipboard contents.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_ADD 0 
15 .uno%3APasteClipboard 5d Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AMD_PASTE_OBJECT%3ALB_INSERT_LIST 42 Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste.
33 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_MV_RIGHT 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_MUL 0 
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSNUMBERS 0 
32 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_NOOP 0 
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_TRANSPOSE 0 
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_OP_SUB 0 
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_LINK 0 
33 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSFORMULAS 0 
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_INSCONT%3ABTN_INSALL 0 
10 .uno%3ASelectAll 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
d .uno%3ASelect 46 Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object.
2e svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
34 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_CALC_SEARCHIN 9b Searches for the characters that you specify in formulae and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulae that contain 'SUM'.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_REGEXP 2b Allows you to use wildcards in your search.
34 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_ROWS 2c Searches from left to right across the rows.
2f svx%3AMoreButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_MORE 60 Shows more or fewer search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_HALFFULLFORMS 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_ALL_SHEETS 43 Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH 63 Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_SEARCH_ALL 89 Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents).
f .uno%3AFindText 50 Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text.
17 .uno%3ASearchProperties 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADownSearch 3b Click to search the next occurrence in downwards direction.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ACB_SOUNDSLIKECJK a1 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
36 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE_ALL 4f Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace.
41 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 40 Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms.
2d SVX%3ALISTBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3APB_SOUNDSLIKESETTINGS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SELECTIONS 29 Searches only the selected text or cells.
31 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 5d Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file.
13 .uno%3ASearchDialog 41 Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_LAYOUTS ce Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Mark this check box, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3AED_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
37 svx%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ARB_CALC_COLUMNS 30 Searches from top to bottom through the columns.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLE_WORDS 48 Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_REPLACE 66 Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence.
33 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_NOFORMAT 7b Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_JAP_SOUNDS_LIKE a1 Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to specify the search options.
28 svx_ComboBox_RID_SVXDLG_SEARCH_ED_SEARCH 56 Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list.
f .uno%3AUpSearch 39 Click to search the next occurrence in upwards direction.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ALB_REPLACE 57 Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 3b Distinguishes between upper-case and lower-case characters.
35 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_JAP_OPTIONS 43 Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_OTHER 48 Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_SHORTER 53 Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ACB_RELAX 53 Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3APB_SIMILARITY 2a Set the options for the similarity search.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROXSETTINGS 88 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
3c cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHSIMILARITY%3ANF_LONGER 6e Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term.
15 CUI_HID_SEARCH_APPROX 88 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ACB_SIMILARITY 88 Find terms that are similar to the Search for text. Mark this check box, and then click the ... button to define the similarity options.
1b CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR_CTL_ATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
12 CUI_HID_SEARCHATTR 32 Select the attributes that you want to search for.
34 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_ATTRIBUTE 122 Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found.
31 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCH%3ABTN_FORMAT 69 Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX18 be Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialogue box is opened.
1c SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_NEW_FILE 27 Creates and inserts a new sub-document.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPDATE 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREEUPD_ALL 15 Updates all contents.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX19 36 Click and choose the contents that you want to update.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_TEXT 93 Inserts a new paragraph in the master document in which you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.
19 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT_LINK 32 Changes the link properties for the selected file.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_IDX 41 Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_LINK 12 Updates all links.
13 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_DEL 2e Deletes the selection from the Navigator list.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX20 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX21 a7 Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_IDX 14 Updates all indexes.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX23 3c Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list.
1e SW_HID_NAVIGATOR_GLOB_TREELIST b8 The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed.
11 SW_HID_NAVI_TBX22 3a Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list.
18 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INS_FILE 3c Inserts one or more existing files into the master document.
14 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_EDIT be Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the index dialogue box is opened.
16 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_INSERT 45 Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document.
17 SW_HID_GLBLTREE_UPD_SEL 26 Updates the contents of the selection.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_UPDATE_NOW 7a Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_MANUAL 37 Only updates the link when you click the Update button.
12 .uno%3AManageLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
36 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_BREAK_LINK 99 Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3ARB_AUTOMATIC d1 Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually.
10 .uno%3AEditLinks c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
11 .uno%3ALinkDialog c6 Lets you edit the properties of each link in the current document, including the path to the source file. This command is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files.
15 CUI_HID_LINKDLG_TABLB 71 Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialogue box in which you can select another object for this link.
39 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_UPDATE_BASELINKS%3APB_CHANGE_SOURCE 2d Change the source file for the selected link.
14 .uno%3APlugInsActive 123 Allows you to edit plug-ins in your file. Choose this command to enable or disable this feature. When enabled, a tick mark appears beside this command, and you find commands to edit the plug-in in its context menu. When disabled, you find commands to control the plug-in in its context menu.
13 .uno%3AOriginalSize 28 Resizes the object to the original size.
12 .uno%3AObjectMenue 60 Lets you edit a selected object in your file that you inserted with the Insert - Object command.
33 cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_FRAMENAME 7b Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore ( _ ).
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_ON 2a Displays the border of the floating frame.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_FRMBORDER_OFF 27 Hides the border of the floating frame.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ACB_MARGINHEIGHTDEFAULT 1c Applies the default spacing.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGON 2e Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGOFF 2b Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINHEIGHT dc Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ARB_SCROLLINGAUTO 59 Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed.
38 cui%3APushButton%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ABT_FILEOPEN 5d Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3ANM_MARGINWIDTH e2 Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents.
2d cui%3AEdit%3AMD_INSERT_OBJECT_IFRAME%3AED_URL a7 Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the ... button and locate the file that you want to display.
2a svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3ACBB_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_APPLY 33 Applies the changes that you made to the image map.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_PROPERTY 3c Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_OPEN 5b Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_CIRCLE b3 Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SELECT 2f Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing.
27 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAP%3AEDT_TEXT 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYDELETE 22 Deletes the selected anchor point.
15 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_MACRO 53 Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser.
1a SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYINSERT 43 Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_GRAPHWND 0 
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_RECT b3 Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_ACTIVE 5e Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYEDIT 4f Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points.
15 .uno%3AImageMapDialog 93 Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots.
16 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_SAVEAS 53 Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLYMOVE 43 Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot.
14 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_POLY 1bb Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
18 SVX_HID_IMAPDLG_FREEPOLY 124 Draws a hotspot that is based on a free-form polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a free-form line and release to close the shape. After, you can enter the Address and the Text for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open.
29 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URL 55 Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot.
34 SVX_MULTILINEEDIT_RID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL_EDT_DESCRIPTION 24 Enter a description for the hotspot.
26 SVX%3AMODALDIALOG%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL 2e Lists the properties for the selected hotspot.
2a SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_NAME 1b Enter a name for the image.
31 SVX%3ACOMBOBOX%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3ACBB_TARGETS a0 Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognised by all browsers from the list.
34 SVX%3AEDIT%3ARID_SVXDLG_IMAPURL%3AEDT_URLDESCRIPTION 59 Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser.
12 .uno%3AChangesMenu 48 Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file.
16 .uno%3ATraceChangeMode 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
13 .uno%3ATrackChanges 4b Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date.
1d .uno%3AProtectTraceChangeMode 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 SC_HID_CHG_PROTECT 87 Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password.
12 .uno%3AShowChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
19 .uno%3AShowTrackedChanges 20 Shows or hides recorded changes.
14 .uno%3ACommentChange 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1c .uno%3ACommentChangeTracking 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
16 CUI_HID_REDLINING_EDIT 28 Enter a comment for the recorded change.
1b .uno%3AAcceptTrackedChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
14 .uno%3AAcceptChanges 22 Accept or reject recorded changes.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_ACTION 31 Lists the changes that were made in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPT 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
13 SW_HID_SORT_COMMENT 4a Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_ACCEPTALL 4a Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECTALL 4a Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_DG_VIEW b0 Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading.
13 SC_HID_SC_SORT_DATE 31 Lists the date and time that the change was made.
19 .uno%3ARejectTracedChange 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_REJECT 59 Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
10 SW_HID_SORT_DATE 2e Sorts the list according to the date and time.
15 SC_HID_SC_SORT_AUTHOR 23 Lists the user who made the change.
1e SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PB_UNDO 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
13 SW_HID_EDIT_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
19 .uno%3AAcceptTracedChange 59 Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document.
1b SVX_HID_REDLINING_VIEW_PAGE 24 Accept or reject individual changes.
16 SC_HID_SC_SORT_COMMENT 33 Lists the comments that are attached to the change.
12 SW_HID_SORT_AUTHOR 27 Sorts the list according to the Author.
12 SW_HID_SORT_ACTION 2f Sorts the list according to the type of change.
14 SC_HID_SORT_POSITION 82 Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method.
19 SC_HID_SC_CHANGES_COMMENT 29 Edit the comment for the selected change.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_AUTOR 5e Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list.
3a sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_HIGHLIGHT_CHANGES%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_LB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_ACTION 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_BTN_REF 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
22 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_IB_CLOCK2 3e Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_DF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
23 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_COMMENT 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_ED_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_RANGE 3b Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter.
20 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_CB_DATE 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
21 SVX_HID_REDLINING_FILTER_TF_DATE2 50 Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify.
32 sc%3AImageButton%3ARID_SCDLG_SIMPLEREF%3ARB_ASSIGN 4f Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter.
15 .uno%3AMergeDocuments 92 Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored.
17 .uno%3ACompareDocuments 3e Compares the current document with a document that you select.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_IDENTIFIER_POS 6a Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FremoveFilter 47 To display all of the records in a table, click the Remove Filter icon.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_YEAR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
13 .uno%3ABib%2Fsource 73 Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.
15 SVX_HID_FM_DELETEROWS 1c Deletes the selected record.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_EDITOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_URL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_TITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NUMBER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SCHOOL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_CHAPTER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
16 .uno%3ABib%2Fsdbsource 35 Select the data source for the bibliography database.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_VOLUME_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_REPORTTYPE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
14 .uno%3ABib%2FMapping bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FInsertRecord 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PUBLISHER_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_BOOKTITLE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_PAGES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MAPPINGDLG bd Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record Object Bar.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_JOURNAL_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHORITYTYPE_POS a5 Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here.
1c .uno%3ABibliographyComponent 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organise records in the bibliography database.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_INSTITUTION_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_MONTH_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_SERIES_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 .uno%3ABib%2FDeleteRecord 1b Deletes the current record.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_HOWPUBLISHED_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_NOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1b .uno%3ABib%2FstandardFilter 4b Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ORGANIZATIONS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
17 .uno%3ABib%2FautoFilter 96 Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field.
12 .uno%3ABib%2Fquery 180 Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this field, and then press Enter.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ANNOTE_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_AUTHOR_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ADDRESS_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_DB_TBX 48 Insert, delete, edit, and organise records in the bibliography database.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_BIB_ISBN_POS 8e Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table.
2a SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_SINGLE 56 The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side.
2d SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_AUTOMATIC 59 The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
18 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
b .uno%3AZoom 37 Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
25 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_CHK_BOOK 83 In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_150 3e Displays the document at one and a half times its actual size.
2a SVX_METRICFIELD_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_ED_COLUMNS 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
28 SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
13 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_75 30 Displays the document at 75% of its actual size.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_200 33 Displays the document at two times its actual size.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_OPTIMAL 45 Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at .
14 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
13 SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_50 31 Displays the document at half of its actual size.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_WHOLE_PAGE 28 Displays the entire page on your screen.
27 SVX_METRICFIELD_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_ED_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
b SID_VIEW050 31 Displays the document at half of its actual size.
1b SVX_HID_MNU_ZOOM_PAGE_WIDTH 6a Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible.
2b SVX_RADIOBUTTON_RID_SVXDLG_ZOOM_BTN_COLUMNS 6c In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns.
b SID_VIEW200 33 Displays the document at two times its actual size.
2d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3AED_USER 5f Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box.
2d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ZOOM%3ABTN_100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
e .uno%3AView100 29 Displays the document at its actual size.
19 .uno%3AFunctionBarVisible 20 Shows or hides the Standard Bar.
1a .uno%3AShowImeStatusWindow 3b Shows or hides the Input Method Engine (IME) status window.
15 .uno%3AToolBarVisible 1d Shows or hides the Tools bar.
17 .uno%3AStatusBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
15 .uno%3ATaskBarVisible 3f Shows or hides the Status Bar at the bottom edge of the window.
1a SFX2_HID_FULLSCREENTOOLBOX 7d In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode.
11 .uno%3AFullScreen 7b Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button.
13 .uno%3AColorControl 8e Show or hides the Colour Bar. To modify or change the colour table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colours tab.
18 SVX_HID_COLOR_CTL_COLORS 14c Click the colour that you want to use. To change the fill colour of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a colour. To change the line colour of the selected object, right-click a colour. To change the colour of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a colour.
18 .uno%3AAvailableToolbars 2b Opens a sub-menu to show and hide toolbars.
18 .cmd%3ARestoreVisibility ab Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behaviour. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.
15 .uno%3ADeleteAllNotes 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
17 .uno%3AInsertAnnotation 12 Inserts a comment.
17 .uno%3ADeleteAnnotation 1b Delete the current comment.
16 .uno%3AShowAnnotations 49 Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments (not available in Calc).
22 .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotationByAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
13 .uno%3ADeleteAuthor 3b Delete all comments by this author in the current document.
11 .uno%3ADeleteNote 1b Delete the current comment.
1a .uno%3ADeleteAllAnnotation 2c Delete all comments in the current document.
b .uno%3AScan 2b Inserts a scanned image into your document.
12 .uno%3ATwainSelect 29 Selects the scanner that you want to use.
14 .uno%3ATwainTransfer 88 Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialogue box is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ABTN_DELETE 4b Clears the current selection of special characters that you want to insert.
d .uno%3ABullet 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
1b CUI_HID_CHARMAP_CTL_SHOWSET 4a Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3AInsertSymbol 34 Inserts special characters from the installed fonts.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ALB_FONT 4c Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_CHARMAP%3ALB_SUBSET 2f Select a Unicode category for the current font.
1a SVT_HID_FILEDLG_PREVIEW_CB 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
1f SVT_HID_FILEOPEN_IMAGE_TEMPLATE 27 Select the frame style for the graphic.
15 HID_IMPGRF_CB_PREVIEW 30 Displays a preview of the selected graphic file.
17 SVT_HID_FILEDLG_LINK_CB 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
1d SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL_TXT 2c Inserts the selected graphic file as a link.
14 .uno%3AInsertGraphic 2c Inserts a picture into the current document.
11 .uno%3AObjectMenu 62 Inserts an object into your document. For movies and sounds, use Insert - Movie and Sound instead.
13 .uno%3AInsertObject 6c Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object.
13 .uno%3AInsertPlugin 2c Inserts a plug-in into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertSound 2f Inserts a sound file into the current document.
12 .uno%3AInsertVideo 2f Inserts a video file into the current document.
1b .uno%3AInsertObjectStarMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
11 .uno%3AInsertMath 2c Inserts a formula into the current document.
20 .uno%3AInsertObjectFloatingFrame 87 Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file.
11 .uno%3ADataImport 6c Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of those databases.
1c .uno%3AViewDataSourceBrowser 6c Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of those databases.
12 .uno%3AGraphicMenu 38 Select the source for a picture that you want to insert.
11 .uno%3ASetDefault 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
16 .uno%3AResetAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
1d .uno%3AStandardTextAttributes 50 Removes direct formatting and formatting by character styles from the selection.
11 .uno%3AFontDialog 45 Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters.
19 CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME 3b Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply.
36 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3a cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_LANG_NOCJK 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
36 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_SIZE 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_LANG 9c Sets the language that the spell checker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a tick mark in front of them.
3c cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_SIZE_NOCJK 6c Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_STYLE_NOCJK 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_STYLE 2d Select the formatting that you want to apply.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_EAST_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3b cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_WEST_NAME_NOCJK 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
34 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_CTL_NAME 59 Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list.
3d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_UNDERLINE_COLOR 26 Select the colour for the underlining.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_EFFECTS2 e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_INDIVIDUALWORDS 3d Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_STRIKEOUT 33 Select a strikethrough style for the selected text.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_UNDERLINE 7d Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
c .uno%3AColor d2 Click to apply the current font colour to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text colour. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font colour toolbar.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_POSITION 2c Specify where to display the emphasis marks.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_RELIEF e1 Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page.
1c CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS 2e Specify the font effects that you want to use.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_EMPHASIS 53 Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text.
f .uno%3AOverline 81 Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_FONTCOLOR 98 Sets the colour for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text colour is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_NAME%3ALB_COLOR2 98 Sets the colour for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text colour is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_OVERLINE_COLOR 25 Select the colour for the overlining.
10 .uno%3AFontColor d2 Click to apply the current font colour to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text colour. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font colour toolbar.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_SHADOW 4b Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ACB_OUTLINE 5b Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_EFFECTS%3ALB_OVERLINE 7b Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 100 Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Automatic, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. Select any language to fix the settings for the selected fields.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_LEADZEROES 4b Enter the maximum number of zeros to display in front of the decimal point.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_FORMAT 5c Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_NEGRED 33 Changes the font colour of negative numbers to red.
1d CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_INFO 2d Adds a comment to the selected number format.
1e CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_LB_FORMAT 49 Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) to be displayed.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CATEGORY 56 Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box.
1c CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_ADD 4a Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ABTN_THOUSAND 6c Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_COMMENT 4f Enter a comment for the selected number format and then click outside this box.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3AED_DECIMALS 3c Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ACB_SOURCEFORMAT 4b Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart.
1f CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT_TBI_REMOVE 23 Deletes the selected number format.
1e .uno%3ATableNumberFormatDialog 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
14 CUI_HID_NUMBERFORMAT 38 Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s).
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUMBERFORMAT%3ALB_CURRENCY 71 Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency.
28 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3APB_EVENT 3c Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink.
f SW_HID_CHAR_URL 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
27 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_VISITED c5 Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialogue box, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_NAME 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
20 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_URL 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_NOT_VISITED c7 Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialogue box, and click the Styles and Formatting icon on the Formatting toolbar.
21 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3AED_TEXT 3a Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink.
19 .uno%3AInsertHyperlinkDlg 38 Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink.
27 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3ALB_TARGET 72 Enter the name of the frame in which you want the linked file to open, or select a predefined frame from the list.
26 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_CHAR_URL%3APB_URL 3e Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_NORMALPOS 2c Removes superscript or subscript formatting.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_HIGHPOS 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
10 .uno%3ASubScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ACB_PAIRKERNING 4c Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_KERNING2 65 Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ARB_LOWPOS 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AMF_SCALE_WIDTH 66 Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text.
12 .uno%3ASuperScript 52 Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ALB_KERNING2 b2 Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_FONTSIZE 50 Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3AED_HIGHLOW 9e Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font.
1d CUI_HID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION 44 Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_POSITION%3ACB_HIGHLOW 6a Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3AED_STARTBRACKET 89 Select the character to define the beginning of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3AED_ENDBRACKET 83 Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CHAR_TWOLINES%3ACB_TWOLINES 5a Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_HANG_PUNC 8b Prevents commas and full stops from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_FORBIDDEN 89 Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PARA_ASIAN%3ACB_AS_SCRIPT_SPACE 3c Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters.
10 .uno%3AEditStyle 50 Modifies the format of the current paragraph, for example indents and alignment.
16 .uno%3AParagraphDialog 50 Modifies the format of the current paragraph, for example indents and alignment.
42 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTPERCENT 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LEFTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.
1c CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_STD 3d Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_BOTTOMDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_RIGHTINDENT 184 Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_TOPDIST 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_LINEDISTMETRIC 2c Enter the value to use for the line spacing.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_AUTO 51 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s).
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3AED_FLINEINDENT 12a Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position".
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_STD_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LINEDIST 4a Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph.
33 cui%3AMetricBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABPOS fa Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimetre, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_DELALL 80 Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_RIGHT 63 Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_NEW 3c Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_DASHLINE 3e Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_LEFT 53 Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_DECIMAL 63 Aligns the decimal point of a number to the centre of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3AED_TABTYPE_DECCHAR 4e Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_OTHER 56 Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_TABTYPE_CENTER 2e Aligns the centre of the text to the tab stop.
11 CUI_HID_TABULATOR 2e Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_NO 5c Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_POINTS 3c Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TABULATOR%3ABTN_FILLCHAR_UNDERSCORE 41 Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINECOLOR 47 Select the line colour that you want to use for the selected border(s).
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_BOTTOM 65 Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_PRESETS 2a Select a predefined border style to apply.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ACB_SYNC 5f Applies the same spacing to contents setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AED_SHADOWSIZE 1e Enter the width of the shadow.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_LEFT 63 Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection.
1a CUI_HID_BORDER_CTL_SHADOWS 2e Click a shadow style for the selected borders.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_RIGHT 64 Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_SHADOWCOLOR 1f Select a colour for the shadow.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3ALB_LINESTYLE 6b Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BORDER%3AMF_TOP 62 Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection.
e CUI_HID_BORDER 43 Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_SELECTOR 35 Select the type of background that you want to apply.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_PARA_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
22 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_BGDCOLORSET 64 Click the colour that you want to use as a background. To remove a background colour, click No Fill.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_PREVIEW 34 Displays or hides a preview of the selected graphic.
18 SVX_HID_POPUP_COLOR_CTRL 74 Click a colour. Click No Fill to remove a background or highlighting colour. Click Automatic to reset a font colour.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ALB_TBL_BOX 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
1f CUI_HID_BACKGROUND_CTL_POSITION 43 Select this option, and then click a location in the position grid.
12 CUI_HID_BACKGROUND 25 Set the background colour or graphic.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_LINK 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_BROWSE 52 Locate the graphic file that you want to use as a background, and then click Open.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3AMF_COL_TRANS 38 Links to or embeds the graphic file in the current file.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_AREA 4b Stretches the graphic to fill the entire background of the selected object.
35 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BACKGROUND%3ABTN_TILE 53 Repeats the graphic so that it covers the entire background of the selected object.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_CENTERALIGN 32 Centres the contents of the paragraph on the page.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_LEFTALIGN 2d Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_COLUMN%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
1e CUI_HID_FORMAT_PARAGRAPH_ALIGN 44 Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_JUSTIFYALIGN 3f Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins.
33 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_FORMAT_TABLE%3ALB_TEXTORIENTATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ABTN_RIGHTALIGN 2e Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ACB_EXPAND 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGN_PARAGRAPH%3ALB_LASTLINE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3APB_ORGSIZE 32 Returns the selected graphic to its original size.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHT 28 Enter a height for the selected graphic.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_HEIGHTZOOM 39 Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_LEFT 161 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTH 27 Enter a width for the selected graphic.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_ZOOMCONST 68 Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes.
36 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3ARB_SIZECONST 123 Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_WIDTHZOOM 39 Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage.
32 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_RIGHT 163 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_BOTTOM 151 If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
30 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRFCROP%3AMF_TOP 14e If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_NEXT 102 Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created.
31 sfx2%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_DESC 3c Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style.
16 SFX2_HID_MANAGE_STYLES 27 Set the options for the selected style.
28 sfx2%3AEdit%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3AED_NAME a7 Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_BASE 69 Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style.
2c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ACB_AUTO b0 Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated.
2d sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_MANAGE_STYLES%3ALB_REGION 7f Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_HEIGHT 61 Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here.
2c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_ADAPT 86 Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_TEXT_FLOW 40 Select the text direction that you want to use in your document.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_BOTTOM_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_TRAY ea Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_LEFT_MARGIN e7 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page.
13 CUI_HID_FORMAT_PAGE 73 Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_PAPER_SIZE 81 Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes.
33 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_LANDSCAPE 4e Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_HORZ 33 Centres the cells horizontally on the printed page.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_REGISTER 43 Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_REGISTER dd Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ACB_VERT 31 Centres the cells vertically on the printed page.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_TOP_MARGIN 5c Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_RIGHT_MARGIN e8 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page.
32 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ARB_PORTRAIT 4c Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_NUMBER_FORMAT 51 Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3ALB_LAYOUT 60 Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PAGE%3AED_PAPER_WIDTH 5f Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the header.
15 SC_HID_SC_HEADER_EDIT 18 Add or edit header text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 51 Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_HEADER 7b Adds a header to the current page style. A header is an area in the top page margin, in which you can add text or graphics.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_HEIGHT 2e Enter the height that you want for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a header to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the header.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 76 Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HEADER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4e Defines a border, a background colour, or a background pattern for the header.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_SHARED 2a Even and odd pages share the same content.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_TURNON 28 Adds a footer to the current page style.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_RMARGIN 67 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer.
30 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_DIST 80 Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_HEIGHT_DYN 4c Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_HEIGHT 29 Enter the height you want for the footer.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ACB_DYNSPACING 71 Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3AED_LMARGIN 65 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer.
15 SC_HID_SC_FOOTER_EDIT 18 Add or edit footer text.
32 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_FOOTER%3ABTN_EXTRAS 4e Defines a border, a background colour, or a background pattern for the footer.
15 SVX_HID_FORMAT_FOOTER 7e Adds a footer to the current page style. A footer is an area in the bottom page margin, in which you can add text or graphics.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToFullWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to full width characters.
1d .uno%3AChangeCaseToToggleCase 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1a SID_TRANSLITERATE_SENTENCE 57 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
1c SID_TRANSLITERATE_CAPITALIZE 68 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToUpper 40 Changes the selected western characters to upper-case characters
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToTitleCase 68 Changes the first character of every word of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
1c .uno%3AChangeCaseToHalfWidth 3f Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters.
18 .uno%3ATransliterateMenu 86 Changes the case of characters in the selection, or if the cursor is in a word, changes the case of all of the characters in the word.
18 .uno%3AChangeCaseToLower 41 Changes the selected western characters to lower-case characters.
1f .uno%3AChangeCaseToSentenceCase 57 Changes the first letter of the selected western characters to an upper-case character.
18 SID_TRANSLITERATE_TOGGLE 30 Toggles case of all selected western characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToKatakana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters.
1b .uno%3AChangeCaseToHiragana 3d Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_3 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_POSITION 2d Select where you want to place the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_4 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_2 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
2f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3APB_STYLIST 65 Opens the Styles and Formatting window from which you can select a character style for the ruby text.
2f svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_CHAR_STYLE 2b Select a character style for the ruby text.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_1 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_1 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
11 .uno%3ARubyDialog 54 Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_3 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
28 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_LEFT_4 82 Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here.
29 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3AED_RIGHT_2 4f Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text.
2b svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_RUBY%3ALB_ADJUST 32 Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text.
15 .uno%3AAlignFrameMenu 34 Aligns selected objects with respect to one another.
10 .uno%3AAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
16 .uno%3AObjectAlignLeft a1 Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.
1c .uno%3AAlignHorizontalCenter a7 Horizontally centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the horizontal centre of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignCenter a7 Horizontally centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the horizontal centre of the page.
11 .uno%3AAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
17 .uno%3AObjectAlignRight a4 Aligns the right edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Impress or Draw, the right edge of the object is aligned to the right page margin.
e .uno%3AAlignUp ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
f .uno%3AAlignTop ab Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin.
12 .uno%3AAlignMiddle a3 Vertically centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the vertical centre of the page.
1a .uno%3AAlignVerticalCenter a3 Vertically centres the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the centre of the object is aligned to the vertical centre of the page.
12 .uno%3AAlignBottom b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
10 .uno%3AAlignDown b1 Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin.
f .uno%3ALeftPara 39 Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin.
10 .uno%3ARightPara 3a Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the right page margin.
11 .uno%3ACenterPara 2e Centres the selected paragraph(s) on the page.
12 .uno%3AJustifyPara cd Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment.
11 .uno%3AMergeCells 45 Combines the contents of the selected table cells into a single cell.
10 .uno%3ASplitCell 65 Splits the cell or group of cells horizontally or vertically into the number of cells that you enter.
12 .uno%3ACellVertTop 3c Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertCenter 44 Centres the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell.
15 .uno%3ACellVertBottom 3f Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell.
b .uno%3ABold 9c Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed.
d .uno%3AItalic a2 Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed.
16 .uno%3AUnderlineDouble 2c Underlines the selected text with two lines.
10 .uno%3AUnderline 39 Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text.
10 .uno%3AStrikeout 57 Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word.
f .uno%3AShadowed 56 Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word.
15 .uno%3ADistributeRows 60 Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara1 52 Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting.
12 .uno%3ASpacePara15 45 Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines.
11 .uno%3ASpacePara2 3c Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines.
18 .uno%3ADistributeColumns 63 Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection.
18 .uno%3AStyleNewByExample 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
33 sfx2%3AComboBox%3ADLG_NEW_STYLE_BY_EXAMPLE%3ALB_COL 1f Enter a name for the new Style.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_SWDLG_STRINPUT%3AED_INPUT 37 Enter a name for the new AutoFormat, and then click OK.
13 .uno%3ARenameObject 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_NAME%3ANTD_EDT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1e SW_HID_FORMAT_NAME_OBJECT_NAME 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
1b SD_HID_SD_NAMEDIALOG_OBJECT 50 Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator.
10 .uno%3ANameGroup 60 Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_TITLE 7c Enter a title text. This short name is visible as an alternative tag in HTML format. Accessibility tools can read this text.
1d .uno%3AObjectTitleDescription 9c Assigns a title and a description to the selected object. These are accessible for accessibility tools and as alternative tags when you export the document.
41 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_OBJECT_TITLE_DESC%3ANTD_EDT_DESC e3 Enter a description text. The long description text can be entered to describe a complex object or group of objects to users with screen reader software. The description is visible as an alternative tag for accessibility tools.
11 .uno%3AFormatLine 32 Sets the formatting options for the selected line.
11 .uno%3AXLineColor 1d Select a colour for the line.
11 .uno%3AXLineStyle 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACB_SYMBOL_RATIO 53 Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_END_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_START_STYLE 41 Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line.
11 CUI_HID_LINE_LINE 93 Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_COLOR 1d Select a colour for the line.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMB_SYMBOL_BITMAP 3b Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_WIDTH 1d Enter a width for the symbol.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_LINE_TRANSPARENT 71 Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque.
37 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_START 4e Places the centre of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 8a Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or centre an arrowhead.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMF_SYMBOL_HEIGHT 1e Enter a height for the symbol.
35 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ATSB_CENTER_END 4e Places the centre of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_LINE_WIDTH 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3ALB_LINE_STYLE 2b Select the line style that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ALineWidth 99 Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium.
3a cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_START_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE%3AMTR_FLD_END_WIDTH 20 Enter a width for the arrowhead.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_2 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 8a Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAME%3AEDT_STRING d Enter a name.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_LENGTH_1 1d Enter the length of the dash.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_LINESTYLES 31 Select the style of line that you want to create.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_2 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 34 Creates a new line style using the current settings.
35 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ANUM_FLD_1 50 Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence.
10 CUI_HID_LINE_DEF 2c Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 45 Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_1 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1e Imports a list of line styles.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINE_DEF%3ALB_TYPE_2 38 Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_SAVE 46 Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3AEDT_NAME 2e Displays the name of the selected arrow style.
13 CUI_HID_LINE_ENDDEF 1c Edit or create arrow styles.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_LOAD 1f Imports a list of arrow styles.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_ADD 5d To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ABTN_MODIFY 2d Changes the name of the selected arrow style.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_LINEEND_DEF%3ALB_LINEENDS 39 Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box.
11 .uno%3AFormatArea 38 Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_GRADIENT 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHBCKGRDCOLOR 58 Click the colour that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern.
2b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_COLOR 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
2e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_ROW 63 Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STEPCOUNT 5e Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colours of the gradient.
11 CUI_HID_AREA_AREA 35 Set the fill options for the selected drawing object.
2f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_TILE 2d Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_SIZE 1e Enter a height for the bitmap.
10 .uno%3AFillStyle 4e Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_OFFSET 33 Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns.
33 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_ORIGINAL 8f Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, unmark this check box, and then click Relative.
30 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_SCALE fe Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes. Unmark this check box to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes.
31 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ARBT_COLUMN 61 Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter.
32 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ATSB_STRETCH 61 Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, unmark the Tile check box.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_HATCHING 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
39 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ANUM_FLD_STEPCOUNT 4b Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colours of the gradient.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_OFFSET 32 Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_X_SIZE 1d Enter a width for the bitmap.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ACB_HATCHBCKGRD 71 Applies a background colour to the hatching pattern. Mark this check box, and then choose a colour from the list.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3AMTR_FLD_Y_OFFSET 30 Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_AREA%3ALB_BITMAP 3d Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object.
15 CUI_HID_AREA_GRADIENT 42 Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_FROM 74 Enter the intensity for the colour in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected colour.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_LOAD 23 Load a different list of gradients.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_ANGLE 31 Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_ADD 6f Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_FROM 38 Select a colour for the beginning point of the gradient.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENT_TYPES 2b Select the gradient that you want to apply.
32 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_COLOR_TO 31 Select a colour for the endpoint of the gradient.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_SAVE 43 Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_X cf Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint colour in the gradient. The endpoint colour is the colour that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_CENTER_Y cb Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint colour in the gradient. The endpoint colour is the colour that is selected in the To box.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_COLOR_TO 72 Enter the intensity for the colour in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected colour.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3AMTR_BORDER 9f Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint colour on the gradient. The endpoint colour is the colour that is selected in the To box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ALB_GRADIENTS 3d Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRADIENT%3ABTN_MODIFY 80 Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_TYPE 34 Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_ADD 80 Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 54 Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid.
12 CUI_HID_AREA_HATCH 4a Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_HATCHINGS 6c Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_SAVE 4b Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_LOAD 2c Loads a different list of hatching patterns.
14 CUI_HID_TPHATCH_CTRL 4e Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ABTN_MODIFY 87 Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 48 Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HATCH%3ALB_LINE_COLOR 25 Select the colour of the hatch lines.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_MODIFY 97 Replaces a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor with the current bitmap pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_LOAD 22 Loads a different list of bitmaps.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BACKGROUND_COLOR 33 Select a background colour for your bitmap pattern.
31 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_SAVE 41 Saves the current list of bitmaps, so that you can load it later.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_COLOR 55 Select a foreground colour, and then click in the grid to add a pixel to the pattern.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_BITMAP 95 Select a bitmap that you want to use as a fill pattern, or create your own pixel pattern. You can also import bitmaps, and save or load bitmap lists.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_IMPORT 80 Locate the bitmap that you want to import, and then click Open. The bitmap is added to the end of the list of available bitmaps.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ALB_BITMAPS 5d Select a bitmap from the list, and then click OK to apply the pattern to the selected object.
2f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_BITMAP%3ABTN_ADD 49 Adds a bitmap that you created in the Pattern Editor to the current list.
15 CUI_HID_TPSHADOW_CTRL 28 Click where you want to cast the shadow.
11 .uno%3AFillShadow c9 Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ALB_SHADOW_COLOR 1f Select a colour for the shadow.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 52 Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object.
3f cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3AMTR_SHADOW_TRANSPARENT 64 Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SHADOW%3ATSB_SHOW_SHADOW 2d Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object.
13 CUI_HID_AREA_SHADOW 55 Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_X 2d Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient.
41 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_END_VALUE 74 Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_ANGLE 28 Enter a rotation angle for the gradient.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_LINEAR 8d Turns on colour transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_OFF 1e Turns off colour transparency.
43 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_START_VALUE 7b Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ALB_TRGR_GRADIENT_TYPES 40 Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRANSPARENT 6f Adjusts the transparency of the current fill colour. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent).
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3ARBT_TRANS_GRADIENT 75 Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill colour. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_BORDER 6b Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%.
40 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TRANSPARENCE%3AMTR_TRGR_CENTER_Y 2b Enter the vertical offset for the gradient.
15 .uno%3ATextAttributes 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
15 CUI_HID_PAGE_TEXTATTR 59 Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 63 Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_TOP 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text.
1d CUI_HID_TEXTATTR_CTL_POSITION 36 Click where you want to place the anchor for the text.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_BOTTOM 7a Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FIT_TO_SIZE 46 Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_WORDWRAP_TEXT 59 Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_RIGHT 79 Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text.
3c cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_SIZE 56 Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3AMTR_FLD_LEFT 77 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text.
3d cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 61 Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_CONTOUR 54 Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTATTR%3ATSB_FULL_WIDTH 48 Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object.
16 .uno%3ATransformDialog 37 Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ANCHOR 0 
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 6f Enter the horizontal distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
42 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_WIDTH 39 Resizes the text to fit the width of the selected object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_WIDTH 26 Enter a width for the selected object.
13 CUI_HID_TPSIZE_CTRL 7d Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ACBX_SCALE 3a Maintains proportions when you resize the selected object.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ALB_ORIENT 0 
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_POSPROTECT 44 Prevents changes to the position or the size of the selected object.
17 CUI_HID_TPPOSITION_CTRL f2 Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the amount that you want to shift the object relative to the base point that you selected in the Position Y and Position X boxes. The base points correspond to the selection handles on an object.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_HEIGHT 27 Enter a height for the selected object.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_SIZEPROTECT 26 Prevents you from resizing the object.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 6d Enter the vertical distance that you want to move the object relative to the base point selected in the grid.
43 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_POSITION_SIZE%3ATSB_AUTOGROW_HEIGHT 3a Resizes the text to fit the height of the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 48 Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL2 3f Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees.
18 CUI_HID_TPROTATION_CTRL1 2e Click where you want to place the pivot point.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_ANGLE 1c Rotates the selected object.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_Y 4d Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ANGLE%3AMTR_FLD_POS_X 50 Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 22 Enter the angle of the slant axis.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_SLANT%3AMTR_FLD_RADIUS 49 Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners.
13 CUI_HID_TRANS_SLANT 4a Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ACB_LAENGE 3d Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_WINKEL 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ANSATZ 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3ALB_ANSATZ_REL 56 Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box.
33 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_LAENGE 73 Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line.
34 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_CAPTION%3AMF_ABSTAND 6a Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box.
18 CUI_HID_CAPTION_CTL_TYPE 47 Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout.
f .uno%3AFlipMenu 36 Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically.
1b .uno%3AObjectMirrorVertical 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
11 .uno%3AMirrorVert 3b Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom.
1d .uno%3AObjectMirrorHorizontal 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
11 .uno%3AMirrorHorz 3d Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right.
15 .uno%3AObjectPosition 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
12 .uno%3AArrangeMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
17 .uno%3AArrangeFrameMenu 35 Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s).
13 .uno%3ABringToFront 64 Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects.
e .uno%3AForward 5e Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to the top of the stacking order.
17 .uno%3AObjectForwardOne 5e Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to the top of the stacking order.
f .uno%3ABackward 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
14 .uno%3AObjectBackOne 63 Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order.
11 .uno%3ASendToBack 66 Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToForeground 2b Moves the selected object in front of text.
1c .uno%3ASetObjectToBackground 26 Moves the selected object behind text.
11 .uno%3AAnchorMenu 33 Sets the anchoring options for the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPage 2e Anchors the selected item to the current page.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToPara 33 Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToCell 24 Anchors the selected item to a cell.
17 .uno%3ASetAnchorToFrame 33 Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorAsChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
16 .uno%3ASetAnchorToChar c0 Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectBezierMode 39 Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object.
1f SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_OFF 38 Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_ROTATE 4c Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline.
24 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_AUTOSIZE 38 Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline.
20 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_LEFT 35 Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline.
f .uno%3AFontWork 6c Edits Fontwork effects of the selected object that has been created with the previous Fontwork dialogue box.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_X 55 Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTX 36 Horizontally slants the characters in the text object.
36 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3ACLB_SHADOW_COLOR 24 Select a colour for the text shadow.
1c SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_OUTLINE 44 Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_CENTER 26 Centres the text on the text baseline.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_DISTANCE 75 Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters.
3b svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_TEXTSTART 6d Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text.
1e SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_OFF 1c Removes baseline formatting.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_FONTWORK%3AMTR_FLD_SHADOW_Y 53 Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_SLANT a2 Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_RIGHT 36 Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHADOW_NORMAL 9c Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes.
1a SVX_HID_FONTWORK_CTL_FORMS 42 Click the shape of the baseline that you want to use for the text.
21 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_SLANTY 34 Vertically slants the characters in the text object.
1d SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_SHOWFORM 46 Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_ADJUST_MIRROR 9c Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text.
22 SVX_HID_FONTWORK_TBI_STYLE_UPRIGHT 97 Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters.
10 .uno%3AGroupMenu 61 Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object.
12 .uno%3AFormatGroup 4a Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object.
14 .uno%3AFormatUngroup 38 Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects.
11 .uno%3AEnterGroup a1 Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups.
11 .uno%3ALeaveGroup 54 Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group.
3f cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_STOP_INSIDE 31 Text remains visible after the effect is applied.
3b cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_ENDLESS 9c Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, unmark this check box, and enter a number in the Continuous box.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ALB_EFFECT 8f Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect.
39 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_RIGHT 20 Scrolls text from left to right.
40 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_START_INSIDE 49 Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_DOWN 20 Scrolls text from top to bottom.
39 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_PIXEL 23 Measures increment value in pixels.
38 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_LEFT 20 Scrolls text from right to left.
36 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ABTN_UP 20 Scrolls text from bottom to top.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_DELAY 3d Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect.
3e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3AMTR_FLD_AMOUNT 3b Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text.
38 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ATSB_AUTO c7 $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, unmark this check box, and then enter a value in the Automatic box.
29 cui%3ATabPage%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION 44 Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object.
3e cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_TEXTANIMATION%3ANUM_FLD_COUNT 47 Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ROWHEIGHT 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_ROW_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
31 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3AMF_VALUE 2a Enter the row height that you want to use.
10 .uno%3ARowHeight 3c Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ROWHEIGHT%3ACB_STANDARD c1 Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents.
30 dbaccess%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3AMF_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
12 .uno%3AColumnWidth 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
2f sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3AED_VALUE 2c Enter the column width that you want to use.
30 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_COLWIDTH%3ACB_STANDARD 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_COL_MAN%3ABTN_DEFVAL 41 Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNWIDTH 41 Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns.
11 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT 57 Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells.
3e cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_ASIAN_VERTICAL 133 Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ANF_DEGREES a2 Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_VERALIGN 50 Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell content.
36 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_SHRINK aa Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ALB_HORALIGN 52 Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell content.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_HYPH 3c Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line.
1a CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 2e Click in the dial to set the text orientation.
35 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3AED_INDENT 44 Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter.
34 cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_WRAP 66 Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell.
21 CUI_HID_ALIGNMENT_CTR_BORDER_LOCK 3b Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text.
3a cui%3ATriStateBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ALIGNMENT%3ABTN_TXTSTACKED 17 Aligns text vertically.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_PREV 27 Go to the previous record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_LAST 23 Go to the last record in the table.
18 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEXT 23 Go to the next record in the table.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_TABBROWSER 87 Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_ABSOLUTE 4d Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter.
1c SVX_HID_GRID_NUMBEROFRECORDS b7 Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7.
19 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_FIRST 24 Go to the first record in the table.
17 SVX_HID_GRID_TRAVEL_NEW 2c Inserts a new record into the current table.
20 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLEFORMAT 1c Formats the selected row(s).
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_COLUMNFORMAT 1f Formats the selected column(s).
f .uno%3AWindow3D 42 Specifies the properties of 3-D object(s) in the current document.
33 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_VERTICAL 50 Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3-D rotation object
2d svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_GEO 10f Adjusts the shape of the selected 3-D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3-D object that was created by converting a 2-D object. To convert a 2-D object to 3-D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3-D, or Convert - To 3-D Rotation Object.
35 svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ANUM_HORIZONTAL 53 Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3-D rotation object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_INVERT 19 Inverts the light source.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_END_ANGLE 53 Enter the angle in degrees to use for rotation in the selected 3-D rotation object.
3a svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_PERCENT_DIAGONAL 53 Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3-D object.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_FLAT 24 Renders the 3-D surface as polygons.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_SPHERE 1d Renders a smooth 3-D surface.
3c svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TWO_SIDED_LIGHTING 8f Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_DOUBLE_SIDED 63 Closes the shape of a 3-D object that was created by extruding a free-form line (Convert - To 3-D).
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_NORMALS_OBJ 81 Renders the 3-D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface.
33 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_BACKSCALE 68 Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3-D object.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DEPTH 69 Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3-D object. This option is not valid for 3-D rotation objects.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_REPRESENTATION 40 Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3-D object.
36 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_FOCAL_LENGTH 81 Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens.
2f svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_SLANT 3b Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SHADOW_3D 36 Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3-D object.
32 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_DISTANCE 55 Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the centre of the selected object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_SHADEMODE 138 Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single colour to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colours across the polygons. Phong shading averages the colour of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_COLOR 26 Select a colour for the ambient light.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
2f svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT 34 Define the light source for the selected 3-D object.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
2c svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_LIGHT_1 2d Select a colour for the current light source.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 d3 Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a colour for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the colour of the surrounding light, by selecting a colour from the Ambient light box.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 26 Select a colour for the ambient light.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_COLOR 1f Converts the texture to colour.
31 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEXTURE 137 Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3-D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl (Mac: Shift+Command), and then drag an image onto the selected 3-D object.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_X 34 Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_X 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
35 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_REPLACE 24 Applies the texture without shading.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_PARALLEL_Y 32 Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_X 41 Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_OBJECT_Y 4c Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object.
34 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_FILTER 37 Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_CIRCLE_Y 3f Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere.
37 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_LUMINANCE 28 Converts the texture to black and white.
36 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_TEX_MODULATE 7f Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialogue box.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_SPECULAR_COLOR 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
32 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MATERIAL 31 Changes the colouring of the selected 3-D object.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_SPECULAR 36 Select the colour that you want the object to reflect.
38 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_EMISSION_COLOR 36 Select the colour that you want the object to reflect.
31 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_EMISSION 2b Select the colour to illuminate the object.
40 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3AMTR_MAT_SPECULAR_INTENSITY 2b Enter the intensity of the specular effect.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ABTN_MAT_COLOR 2b Select the colour to illuminate the object.
2e svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_COLOR 37 Select the colour that you want to apply to the object.
32 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXFLOAT_3D%3ALB_MAT_FAVORITES 5b Select a predefined colour scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom colour scheme.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_DISTANCE 64 Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_LEFT 6b Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
38 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_TOP 6a Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1a .uno%3ADistributeSelection 9d Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_BOTTOM 6d Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_RIGHT 6c Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_NONE 2b Does not distribute the objects vertically.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_VER_CENTER 71 Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centres of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_CENTER 73 Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centres of the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_NONE 2d Does not distribute the objects horizontally.
3d cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_DISTRIBUTE%3ABTN_HOR_DISTANCE 66 Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL 49 Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion.
20 CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORERULE 74 While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_LANGUAGE 34 Specifies the language to use to check the spelling.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ACB_CHECK_GRAMMAR 54 Mark Check grammar to work first on all spelling errors, then on all grammar errors.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_UNDO 74 Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AMB_ADDTODICT 33 Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3ALB_SUGGESTION 7e Lists suggested words to replace the misspelt word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Change or Change All.
1f .uno%3ASpellingAndGrammarDialog a0 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialogue box also checks for grammar errors.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 88 Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelt word, the entire sentence is replaced.
38 cui%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3AED_NEWWORD 8f Displays the sentence with the misspelt word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below.
f .uno%3ASpelling a0 Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialogue box also checks for grammar errors.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_OPTIONS 75 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for checking spelling.
1f CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 64 Skips all occurrences of the unknown word in the entire document and continues with the spell check.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SPELLCHECK%3APB_AUTOCORR 75 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for checking spelling.
1c CUI_HID_SPLDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 3a Skips the unknown word and continues with the spell check.
17 .uno%3AMoreDictionaries 3d Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page.
13 .uno%3ALanguageMenu 46 Opens a sub-menu from which you can choose language-specific commands.
18 .uno%3AChineseConversion 8a Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted.
35 svx%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3AMB_LANGUAGE 24 Select a language for the thesaurus.
16 .uno%3AThesaurusDialog 53 Opens a dialogue box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2b svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3AED_REPL af The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box.
33 svx%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ABTN_LEFT 3d Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box.
10 .uno%3AThesaurus 53 Opens a dialogue box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term.
2f svx%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_THESAURUS%3ACB_WORD b6 Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text.
1c CUI_HID_CT_THES_ALTERNATIVES c8 Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term.
30 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ABTN_EXEC 76 Replaces the selected source colours in the current image with the colours that you specify in the Replace with boxes.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_TBI_PIPETTE 8f Select one of the four source colour boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the colour that you want to replace.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_3 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_1 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
1b SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_PIPETTE a7 Displays the colour in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Colour Replacer tool is selected.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_4 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
1a SVX_HID_BMPMASK_CTL_QCOL_1 b3 Displays the colour in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source colour, click here, click the Colour Replacer, and then click a colour in the selected image.
2d svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_TRANS 48 Select the colour to replace the transparent areas in the current image.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_4 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_3 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_2 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_2 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_1 72 Mark this check box to replace the current Source colour with the colour that you specify in the Replace with box.
e .uno%3ABmpMask 67 Opens the Colour Replacer dialogue box, where you can replace colours in bitmap and meta file graphics.
2f svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ACBX_TRANS 50 Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the colour that you select.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_3 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_4 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
2d svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ASP_1 d7 Set the tolerance for replacing a source colour in the source image. To replace colours that are similar to the colour that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colours, enter a higher value.
29 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_BMPMASK%3ALB_2 99 Lists the available replacement colours. To modify the current list of colours, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colours tab.
15 .uno%3AAutoCorrectDlg 3e Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_APPLY%3APB_EDIT 29 Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1e CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFORMAT_CLB 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOFMT_OPTIONS 56 Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK.
20 CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 6e Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document.
1f CUI_HID_OFACTL_AUTOCORR_REPLACE 12f Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_SHORT 47 Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3APB_NEW_REPLACE 33 Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3AED_REPLACE f3 Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_REPLACE%3ACB_TEXT_ONLY 85 Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWDOUBLECAPS 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_ABBREV d9 Type an abbreviation followed by a full stop, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalising the first letter of the word that comes after the full stop at the end of the abbreviation.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3APB_NEWABBREV 31 Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions.
1f CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT 6d Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOABBREV 134 Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalise first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialogue box.
39 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3AED_DOUBLE_CAPS ce Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ACB_AUTOCAPS 134 Automatically adds abbreviations or words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions. This feature only works if the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option or the Capitalise first letter of every sentence option are selected in the [T] column onOptions tab of this dialogue box.
3c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_DOUBLE_CAPS b3 Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters are listed in the field.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_EXCEPT%3ALB_ABBREV 3d Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected.
19 CUI_HID_AUTOCORR_LANGUAGE 4f Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_DBL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
39 cui%3ACheckbox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_SGL_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_STARTQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STD 32 Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_STARTQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
1c CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_QUOTE_SW_CLB 5a Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M].
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_ENDQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3APB_SGL_ENDQUOTE 9e Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Format - AutoCorrect - Apply.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCORR_QUOTE%3ACB_TYPO 78 Automatically replaces the default system symbol for single quotation marks with the special character that you specify.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_WORD_LANGUAGE 63 Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_ADD_WORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
19 SW_HID_LINGU_SPELLING_DLG 23 Opens the Spell Check dialogue box.
22 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_IGNORE 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
23 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_ADDWORD 37 Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary.
1a SW_HID_LINGU_PARA_LANGUAGE 7e Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary.
27 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_AUTOCORRECT a2 To always replace the highlighted word, choose a word from the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
14 SW_HID_LINGU_REPLACE 67 Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect sub-menu for permanent replacement.
15 SW_HID_LINGU_AUTOCORR a2 To always replace the highlighted word, choose a word from the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect Options - Replace.
21 EDITENG_HID_EDITENG_SPELLER_START 23 Opens the Spell Check dialogue box.
18 SW_HID_LINGU_IGNORE_WORD 46 Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_APPEND_SPACE 49 If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_ACTIV 92 Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVE_LIST f3 When marked, the list is cleared upon closing the current document. When cleared, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MAX_ENTRIES 55 Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ALB_ENTRIES ec Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, unmark "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list".
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_AS_TIP 2a Displays the completed word as a Help Tip.
46 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ANF_MIN_WORDLEN 5c Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ACB_COLLECT 87 Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3APB_ENTRIES 41 Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE_OPTIONS%3ADCB_EXPAND_KEY 4c Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion.
38 SVX_PUSHBUTTON_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_PB_SMARTTAGS 78 To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured.
36 SVX_CHECKBOX_RID_OFAPAGE_SMARTTAG_OPTIONS_CB_SMARTTAGS 43 Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document.
14 .uno%3AOutlineBullet 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
20 .uno%3ABulletsAndNumberingDialog 69 Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_BULLET 2c Click the bullet style that you want to use.
1a CUI_HID_VALUESET_SINGLENUM 2f Click the numbering style that you want to use.
14 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUM 2d Click the outline style that you want to use.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_PICK_BMP%3ACB_LINKED 6c If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document.
17 CUI_HID_VALUESET_NUMBMP 33 Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_PREFIX 4c Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ACB_RATIO 2e Maintains the size proportions of the graphic.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3APB_BULLET 55 Opens the Special Characters dialogue box, from which you can select a bullet symbol.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_BUL_COLOR 30 Select a colour for the current numbering style.
37 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_START 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_ORIENT 2c Select the alignment option for the graphic.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_CHARFMT 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
3b cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ANF_ALL_LEVEL 32 Enter a new starting number for the current level.
36 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMB_BITMAP 50 Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet.
36 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_WIDTH 1e Enter a width for the graphic.
37 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_LEVEL 47 Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for.
3d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_BUL_REL_SIZE 7b Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph.
37 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AMF_HEIGHT 1f Enter a height for the graphic.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3AED_SUFFIX a0 Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_OPTIONS%3ALB_FMT 31 Select a numbering style for the selected levels.
2f sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
38 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN 124 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centred" to centre the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
2e sw%3AMultiListBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT_AT 80 Enter the distance from the left page margin to the beginning of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_NUMDIST 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2e sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_INDENT 6f Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_BORDERDIST f1 Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin (or the left edge of the text object) and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ACB_RELATIVE 4f Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy.
38 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LEVEL 2c Select the level(s) that you want to modify.
3c cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_ALIGNED_AT 5b Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned.
2f sw%3APushButton%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN_2 124 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centred" to centre the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
39 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3AMF_LISTTAB 6e If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position.
3f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_LABEL_FOLLOWED_BY 53 Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, or nothing.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_NUM_POSITION%3ALB_ALIGN 124 Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centred" to centre the symbol around the "Aligned at" position.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_NUM_POSITION%3APB_STANDARD 3f Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
18 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS ab Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialogue box.
34 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
12 .uno%3AMacroDialog 28 Opens a dialogue box to organise macros.
33 basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_ED_MACRONAME 67 Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 2f Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 16 Creates a new library.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 29 Saves the recorded macro in a new module.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_PASSWORD 37 Assigns or edits the password for the selected library.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 51 Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_RUN 20 Runs or saves the current macro.
2f basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_EDIT 59 Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing.
2e basctl%3AListBox%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_LB_BASICS 60 Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organise.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_DLGS%3ARID_PB_NEWDLG 2a Opens the editor and creates a new dialog.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_ORG 7c Opens the Macro Organiser dialogue box, in which you can add, edit or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_ASSIGN 88 Opens the Customise dialogue box, in which you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a shortcut key combination, or an event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_DEL 2a Prompts you to delete the selected script.
2f basctl%3AEdit%3ARID_DLG_NEWLIB%3ARID_ED_LIBNAME 2b Enter a name for the new library or module.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_CREATE 15 Creates a new script.
1d BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBS_TREE 56 Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RENAME 4d Opens a dialogue box in which you can change the name of the selected script.
31 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_LIBS%3ARID_PB_APPEND 65 Locate the $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open.
36 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_NEWLIB 2a Saves the recorded macro in a new library.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_EDIT 3a Opens the default script editor for your operating system.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_MACROCHOOSER%3ARID_PB_DEL 33 Creates a new macro, or deletes the selected macro.
12 CUI_HID_SCRIPTSBOX 83 Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry.
33 basctl%3APushButton%3ARID_TP_MODULS%3ARID_PB_NEWMOD 2a Opens the editor and creates a new module.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MODULES_TREE 26 Lists the existing macros and dialogs.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SCRIPTORGANIZER%3ASF_PB_RUN 41 To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run.
1a BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_MACROS 52 Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list.
15 .uno%3AMacroSignature 74 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialogue box to view certificates.
f .uno%3ARunMacro 36 Opens a dialogue box with which you can start a macro.
27 .uno%3AMacroOrganizer%3FTabId%3Ashort=1 32 Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organiser.
14 .uno%3AMacroRecorder 14 Records a new macro.
14 .uno%3AStopRecording 18 Stops recording a macro.
33 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_REPEAT_PASSWD 33 Re-enter the new password for the selected library.
10 SVX_HID_PASSWORD 2e Protects the selected library with a password.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLD_PASSWD 34 Enter the current password for the selected library.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_PASSWORD%3AED_NEW_PASSWD 2e Enter a new password for the selected library.
44 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=BeanShell 37 Opens a dialogue box in which you can organise scripts.
16 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer 5b Opens a sub-menu with links to dialogue boxes in which you can organise macros and scripts.
45 .uno%3AScriptOrganizer%3FScriptOrganizer.Language%3Astring=JavaScript 37 Opens a dialogue box in which you can organise scripts.
20 BASCTL_HID_BASICIDE_LIBSDLG_TREE 6d Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list.
2e basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REPL 43 Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library.
2d basctl%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_LIBS%3ARID_CB_REF 6d Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time that you start %PRODUCTNAME.
16 .uno%3AConfigureDialog 59 Customises $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
12 .uno%3ALoadToolBox 59 Customises $[officename] menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_ADD_COMMANDS b5 Opens the Add Commands dialogue box. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
31 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE 2a Opens a sub-menu with additional commands.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_NEW 7a Opens the New Menu dialogue box in which you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu.
1b CUI_HID_SELECTOR_CATEGORIES 60 Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
35 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_DOWN 2a Moves the selected item down one position.
33 cui%3AImageButton%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3ABTN_MENU_UP 28 Moves the selected item up one position.
37 cui%3AMenuButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_CHANGE_ENTRY 2f Opens a menu that contains additional commands.
19 CUI_HID_SELECTOR_COMMANDS 60 Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_MENUS 33 Select the menu and sub-menu that you want to edit.
2d cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ALB_SAVEIN 4a Select the application or open document to which you want to add the menu.
2f cui%3AEdit%3AMD_MENU_ORGANISER%3AEDIT_MENU_NAME 76 Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_CONFIG_MENU_LISTBOX 6e Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_MODULE 41 Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_SAVE 4c Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_CHANGE 6c Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_RESET 32 Resets modified values back to the default values.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ABTN_ACC_REMOVE 48 Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation.
22 CUI_HID_CONFIGFUNCTION_ACC_LISTBOX dd Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list.
34 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_KEYBOARD%3ARB_OFFICE 49 Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications.
1b CUI_HID_ACCELCONFIG_LISTBOX be Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify.
14 CUI_HID_CONFIG_ACCEL 5d Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
1f CUI_HID_CONFIGGROUP_ACC_LISTBOX 63 Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category.
13 CUI_HID_SVX_SAVE_IN 3d Select the location for loading and saving the configuration.
1f CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR_ITEM 22 The Modify button opens a sub-menu
2e cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_UP 27 Moves the selected item up in the list.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MODIFY_TOOLBAR 23 The Toolbar button opens a sub-menu
17 CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR 77 Opens the Name dialogue box, with which you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MENUS%3ABTN_DOWN 29 Moves the selected item down in the list.
1c CUI_HID_SVX_NEW_TOOLBAR_ITEM 85 Opens the Add Commands dialogue box. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customise dialogue box.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_DELETE 58 Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed.
2f cui%3APushButton%3AMD_ICONSELECTOR%3ABTN_IMPORT a4 Adds new icons to the list of icons. You will see a file open dialogue box that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME.
12 .uno%3ATableEvents 6d Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_ASSIGN 41 Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event.
1a CUI_HID_SVX_MACRO_LB_EVENT b1 The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_MACROASSIGN%3APB_DELETE 34 Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event.
2e cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_EVENTS%3ALB_SAVEIN 59 Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_SETTINGS_DIALOG 2d Displays the help page for this dialogue box.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_SAVE 5c Displays a Save as dialogue box to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST 38 Opens a dialogue box with the name of the selected file.
1c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DELETE 4a Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialogue box that follows.
1c .uno%3AOpenXMLFilterSettings 85 Opens the XML Filter Settings dialogue box, in which you can create, edit, delete and test filters to import and to export XML files.
1b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OPEN 53 Displays an Open dialogue box to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar).
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EDIT 38 Opens a dialogue box with the name of the selected file.
19 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NEW 33 Opens a dialogue box with the name of a new filter.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_LIST 3a Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TABPAGE_BASIC 34 Enter or edit general information for an XML filter.
1f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXTENSION 99 Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use.
1a FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_NAME 60 Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialogue box.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DESCRIPTION 1b Enter a comment (optional).
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_APPLICATION 3c Select the application that you want to use with the filter.
24 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_INTERFACE_NAME 54 Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogue boxes.
1d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DOCTYPE 22 Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing.
19 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DTD 6e If you want, enter the public or system identifier of the DTD (Document Type Definition) that you want to use.
25 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE 7b Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags.
21 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_EXPORT_XSLT 6b If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting.
2c FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
20 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_DTD_BROWSE 24 Opens a file selection dialogue box.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT 42 Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialogue box.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_CURRENT d9 The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_BROWSE 94 Locate the file to which you want to apply the XML export filter. The XML code of the transformed file is displayed in the XML Filter output window.
2d FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_RECENT_FILE 42 Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialogue box.
2f FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_TEMPLATE_FILE 57 Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
30 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_DISPLAY_SOURCE 8f Opens the XML Filter output window, where the XML source of the selected document is displayed. The document is used to test the import filter.
2b FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_EXPORT_XSLT_FILE 5a Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page.
28 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_IMPORT_BROWSE 65 Opens a file selection dialogue box. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_SOURCE_FILE_VALIDATE 37 Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window.
23 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_OUTPUT_WINDOW 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
29 FILTER_HID_XML_FILTER_TEST_VALIDATE_OUPUT 28 Lists the test results of an XML filter.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNOREALL 86 No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time that the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_IGNORE 6d No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_REPLACE_BY_CHARACTER 75 Mark this check box to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not marked, full words are replaced.
1f CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGE 5d Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_SIMPLE_CONVERSION 41 The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BRACKETED 43 The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_OPTIONS 2c Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialogue box.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_ABOVE 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANJA_HANGUL_BELOW 44 The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_GRID 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_ABOVE 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS_LIST 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANJA_ONLY 41 Mark this check box to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ACB_HANGUL_ONLY 41 Mark this check box to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja.
1d CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_SUGGESTIONS 36 Displays all available replacements in the dictionary.
22 CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_BUTTON_CHANGEALL af Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time that the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BRACKETED 43 The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part.
1c .uno%3AHangulHanjaConversion 4f Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul.
35 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3APB_FIND 57 Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA%3ARB_HANGUL_HANJA_BELOW 44 The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part.
18 CUI_HID_SPELLDLG_SETWORD 1f Displays the current selection.
1e CUI_HID_HANGULDLG_EDIT_NEWWORD 3e Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_DELETE 2d Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_EDIT 60 Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialogue box in which you can edit any user-defined dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3APB_HHO_NEW 50 Opens the New dictionary dialogue box, in which you can create a new dictionary.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_IGNOREPOST 56 Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_SHOWRECENTLYFIRST 60 Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list.
20 CUI_HID_HANGULHANJA_OPT_DICTS_LB ad Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Mark the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Unmark the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_OPT%3ACB_AUTOREPLACEUNIQUE 4b Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 20 Enter a name for the dictionary.
40 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_4 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_3 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_2 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3AED_1 95 Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_BOOK 39 Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3APB_HHE_NEW 3a Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary.
3c cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_HANGULHANJA_EDIT%3ALB_ORIGINAL 79 Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box.
12 .uno%3ASpellDialog 19 Checks spelling manually.
10 .uno%3ANewWindow 44 Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_STD 2a Opens the Select Certificate dialogue box.
3e xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_DIGSIG%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 28 Opens the View Certificate dialogue box.
33 padmin%3APushButton%3ARID_PADIALOG%3ARID_PA_BTN_DEL 2a Removes the selected source from the list.
29 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_SIGNATURESDLG 36 Lists the digital signatures for the current document.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_DOCINFODOC%3ABTN_SIGNATURE 76 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialogue box to view certificates.
10 .uno%3ASignature 76 Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialogue box to view certificates.
46 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_DESCRIPTIONS 9b While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialogue box, or click Cancel to abort the update check.
21 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATE ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
28 DESKTOP_HID_DEPLOYMENT_GUI_UPDATEINSTALL ec Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update.
38 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_ALL 92 By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialogue box. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages.
39 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE%3ARID_DLG_UPDATE_OK 5a When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialogue box is displayed.
13 .uno%3AInsertZWNBSP 94 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertHardHyphen 4d Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
1d .uno%3AInsertNonBreakingSpace 4c Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks.
10 .uno%3AInsertRLM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
10 .uno%3AInsertLRM 92 Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
19 .uno%3AFormattingMarkMenu 52 Opens a sub-menu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands.
11 .uno%3AInsertZWSP a9 Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled.
17 .uno%3AInsertSoftHyphen 80 Inserts an invisible hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_LISTVIEW 55 Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_NEWTHEME 56 Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme.
16 SVX_HID_GALLERY_WINDOW 52 To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document.
e .uno%3AGallery 5e Opens the Gallery, from which you can select graphics and sounds to insert into your document.
19 SVX_HID_GALLERY_THEMELIST 3c Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme.
18 SVX_HID_GALLERY_ICONVIEW 2e Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_SEARCH 52 Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKE 2f Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme.
40 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBX_PREVIEW 31 Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.
42 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ABTN_TAKEALL 37 Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme.
42 cui%3AMultiListBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ALBX_FOUND 8b Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All.
41 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXTABPAGE_GALLERYTHEME_FILES%3ACBB_FILETYPE 2d Select the type of file that you want to add.
f .uno%3AGridMenu 26 Sets the display properties of a grid.
14 .uno%3ASnapLinesMenu 2d Specifies the display options for snap lines.
14 .uno%3AAVMediaPlayer 85 Opens the Media Player window in which you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document.
14 .uno%3AInsertAVMedia 31 Inserts a video or sound file into your document.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHANGEPATH 2f Click to select a folder to download the files.
36 desktop%3ACheckBox%3ATP_UPDATE_CHECK%3ACB_UPDATE_CHECK 34 You can check for updates manually or automatically.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTODOWNLOAD 92 Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialogue box to disable or enable this feature.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DLG f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD2 9e Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialogue box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_CANCEL 3b Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_RESUME 1c Continues a paused download.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_PAUSE 40 Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.
21 SFX2_HID_DLG_CHECKFORONLINEUPDATE f2 Checks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_INSTALL 1f Installs the downloaded update.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_CHECK_FOR_UPD_DOWNLOAD 9e Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialogue box.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_DISABLE 20 Enable or disable the extension.
1b DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER 5b The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
2d DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_OPTIONS 5d Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialogue box for the extension.
2c DESKTOP_HID_EXTENSION_MANAGER_LISTBOX_REMOVE 44 Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove.
39 service%3Acom.sun.star.deployment.ui.PackageManagerDialog 5b The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
36 desktop%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3AML_LICENSE 87 Read the licence. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
27 DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_TREELISTBOX 81 Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialogue box.
25 DESKTOP_HID_PACKAGE_MANAGER_MENU_ITEM 5b The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions.
38 desktop%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_LICENSE%3APB_LICENSE_DOWN 87 Read the licence. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.
36 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 16 Re-enter the password.
11 SC_HID_PASSWD_DOC 16 Re-enter the password.
13 SC_HID_PASSWD_TABLE 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
10 sfx.Edit.2316.28 16 Re-enter the password.
10 sfx.Edit.2316.26 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
2c sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_CONFIRM 16 Re-enter the password.
24 HID_DLG_PASSWORD_TO_OPEN_MODIFY_MORE 38 Click to show or hide the file sharing password options.
2b uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
2d sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_PASSWORD 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
33 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_PASSWORD_CRT%3AED_PASSWORD_CRT 2e Type a password. A password is case-sensitive.
43 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ALLOWDUPLICATEFIELDNAMES 98 Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_VISIBLE 86 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_TRANSITIONEFFECTS 4d Selects to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_BROWSER 94 Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
36 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTNOTES 45 Selects to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTEMPTYPAGES 190 If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are being exported to pdf file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. The previous chapter ends on an odd page. %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTBOOKMARKS f0 Selects to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Outline Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_NONE 28 No changes of the content are permitted.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENAB_ACCESS 41 Select this option to enable text access for accessibility tools.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_PDFA_1B_SELECT ea Converts to the PDF/A-1a format. This is defined as an electronic document file format for long term preservation. All fonts that were used in the source document will be embedded into the generated PDF file. PDF tags will be written.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_DEFAULT 6c Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system.
35 filter%3AListBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ALB_FORMSFORMAT 3f Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_INSDEL 3a Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_ADDSTREAM 68 This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF.
40 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 51 Selects to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch.
3c filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_DEFAULT c3 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EXPORTFORMFIELDS 60 Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document.
3d FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_INITIAL_PAGE 4d Select this option to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_HIGHRES 2f The document can be printed in high resolution.
43 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_ANY_NOCOPY 33 All changes are permitted, except extracting pages.
3a FILTER_NUMERICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_NUM_BOOKMARKLEVELS 69 Select this option to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_SINGPG 48 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time.
3f FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_VISIBLEBOOKMARKLEVELS 69 Select this option to show bookmark levels down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file.
3a filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ACB_PGLY_FIRSTLEFT 10f Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialogue box.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_LOSSLESSCOMPRESSION 43 Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved.
41 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_FILLFORM 29 Only filling in form fields is permitted.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_NONE 27 Printing the document is not permitted.
39 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIND 6e Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_PRINT_LOWRES 66 The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honour this setting.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_OPNFULL 75 Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows.
40 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ARB_CHANGES_COMMENT 38 Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_JPEGCOMPRESSION ca Selects a JPEG compression of images. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels get lost and artefacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced.
3d filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_THUMBS 60 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents.
3a filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_MAGNF_WIDTH 6d Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window.
3e filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_OUTLINE 53 Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.
40 filter%3AComboBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACO_REDUCEIMAGERESOLUTION 2c Select the target resolution for the images.
39 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_DISPDOCTITLE 6a Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVTOOLBAR 4c Select this option to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_RESINIT 66 Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_EMBEDSTANDARDFONTS fd Normally the 14 standard Postscript fonts are not embedded in a PDF file, because every PDF reader software already contains these fonts. Enable this option to embed the standard fonts that are installed on your system and that are used in the document.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_DEFAULT 76 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software.
2c filter%3AEdit%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3AED_PAGES 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_CNV_OOO_DOCTOPDF d1 Mark this check box to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf.
33 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_RANGE 26 Exports the pages you type in the box.
3f filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_OPNMODE_PAGEONLY 4c Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents.
12 .uno%3AExportToPDF 45 Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4.
31 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_ALL 5c Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document.
37 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ARB_SELECTION 1e Exports the current selection.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_WNDOPT_CNTRWIN 5d Select this option to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centred on screen.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_EXP_BMRK_TO_DEST 140 The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Mark the check box to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows to link to those objects by name from other documents.
38 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONT 5b Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column.
3b FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER_RB_ALLBOOKMARKLEVELS 52 Select this option to show all bookmark levels when the reader opens the PDF file.
33 FILTER_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_RB_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
35 filter%3AMetricField%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ANF_QUALITY 2f Specify the quality level for JPEG compression.
34 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_GENER%3ACB_TAGGEDPDF 78 Select this option to export special tags into the corresponding PDF tags. This can increase file sizes by huge amounts.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVMENUBAR 4d Select this option to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active.
3d filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_VPREFER%3ACB_UOP_HIDEVWINCTRL 4d Select this option to hide the reader's controls when the document is active.
38 filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ACB_ENDAB_COPY 41 Select this option to enable copying of content to the clipboard.
3b filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR%3ARB_PGLY_CONTFAC a2 Select this option to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right.
3b filter%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_ENAB_RELLINKFSYS 81 Mark this check box to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help.
34 filter%3APushButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_SECURITY%3ABTN_PWD 3b Click to open a dialogue box where you enter the passwords.
34 FILTER_METRICFIELD_RID_PDF_TAB_OPNFTR_NUM_MAGNF_ZOOM 3e Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file.
42 filter%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PDF_TAB_LINKS%3ACB_VIEW_PDF_APPLICATION c2 Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink.
17 .uno%3ASendMailDocAsPDF ac Shows the Export as PDF dialogue box, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an e-mail sending window with the PDF as an attachment.
1b UUI_HID_XMLSECDLG_MACROWARN 6c Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialogue box to set the options.
23 SFX2_HID_WARNING_SECURITY_HYPERLINK 6c Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialogue box to set the options.
43 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECDLG_CERTCHOOSER%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 5a Opens the View Certificate dialogue box in which you can examine the selected certificate.
2c XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_CHOOSESIGNATURES 51 Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with.
3f xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3ABTN_VIEWCERT 5a Opens the View Certificate dialogue box in which you can examine the selected certificate.
e .uno%3AWebHtml 95 Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_EDIT 5c Opens a dialogue box to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_REMOVE 43 Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model.
3c svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3ACB_MODIFIES_DOCUMENT d4 When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified".
16 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
18 .uno%3AShowDataNavigator 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_LIST 2e Selects the XForms model that you want to use.
1e SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_SHOW_DETAILS 2d Switches the display to show or hide details.
29 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ATTRIBUTE 76 Opens a dialogue box to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
22 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_REMOVE 42 Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance.
20 SVX_HID_XFORMS_INSTANCES_MENUBTN 43 This button has sub-menus to add, to edit, and to remove instances.
30 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_MODEL%3AED_INST_NAME f Enter the name.
27 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD_ELEMENT 76 Opens a dialogue box to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
19 SVX_HID_XFORMS_ITEMS_LIST 34 Lists the items that belong to the current instance.
22 SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_REMOVE 47 Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding).
1f SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_ADD 39 Opens a dialogue box in which you can add a new instance.
1d SVX_HID_XFORMS_MODELS_MENUBTN 28 Adds, renames and removes XForms models.
20 SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_INSTANCES_EDIT 42 Opens a dialogue box in which you can modify the current instance.
1d SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_EDIT 21 Renames the selected Xform model.
1a SVX_HID_XFORMS_TAB_CONTROL 3c Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document.
1f SVX_HID_XFORMS_TOOLBOX_ITEM_ADD 76 Opens a dialogue box to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item.
1c SVX_HID_MN_XFORMS_MODELS_ADD 45 Opens the Add Model dialogue box in which you can add an XForm model.
38 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
3a svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_CONSTRAINT 1f Declares the item as read-only.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_REQUIRED 1e Declares the item as relevant.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_RELEVANT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
35 svx%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ALB_DATATYPE 2b Select the data type for the selected item.
38 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3APB_READONLY 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
2e svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_NAME 1b Enter the name of the item.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_CALCULATE 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
31 svx%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3AED_DEFAULT 2c Enter a default value for the selected item.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_DATAITEM%3ACB_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
3d svx%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3AED_CONDITION 12 Enter a condition.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_ADD_CONDITION%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACES 57 Opens the Form Namespaces dialogue box in which you can add, edit or delete namespaces.
21 SVX_HID_XFORMS_NAMESPACEITEM_LIST 34 Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form.
3f svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_ADD_NAMESPACE 21 Adds a new namespace to the list.
42 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_DELETE_NAMESPACE 1f Deletes the selected namespace.
40 svx%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_NAMESPACE_ITEM%3APB_EDIT_NAMESPACE 1d Edits the selected namespace.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XML_DATA_MODEL 43 Select a model from the list of all models in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BINDING_NAME d1 Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_DATA_TYPE 41 Select a data type which the control should be validated against.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CONSTRAINT 22 Declares the item as a constraint.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MIN_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values.
21 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_ADD_DATA_TYPE b5 Click the button to open a dialogue box in which you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type.
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_FRACTION_DIGITS 66 Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_WHITESPACES f1 Specifies how whitespace is to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are Preserve, Replace, and Collapse. The semantics follow the definition at http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_TOTAL_DIGITS 5b Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_EXCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_REQUIRED 34 Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_PATTERN 12a Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elsewhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialogue box.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_LENGTH 30 Specifies the number of characters for a string.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_LENGTH 38 Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_MAX_INCLUSIVE 2e Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values.
24 EXTENSIONS_UID_PROP_REMOVE_DATA_TYPE 5a Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_READONLY 1f Declares the item as read-only.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BIND_EXPRESSION 77 Enter the DOM node to bind the control model to. Click the ... button for a dialogue box to enter the XPath expression.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_CALCULATION 25 Declares that the item is calculated.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_XSD_RELEVANT 1e Declares the item as relevant.
13 .uno%3APrintDefault 68 Click the Print File Directly icon to print the active document with the current default print settings.
16 .uno%3ABezier_Unfilled 15d Draws a smooth Bézier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to finish drawing the curve. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the curve.
10 .uno%3ACircleCut 1a6 Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag.
18 .uno%3AFreeline_Unfilled bf Draws a free-form line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line.
e .uno%3AEllipse ad Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag.
b .uno%3ALine 82 Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag.
a .uno%3AArc 145 Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag.
11 .uno%3AInsertDraw 79 Click to open or close the Drawing bar, with which you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to the current document.
17 .uno%3APolygon_Unfilled 125 Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line.
12 .uno%3ADrawCaption 176 Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with horizontal text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand.
13 .uno%3AText_Marquee ca Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. Drag a text frame, and then type or paste your text. To assign an animation effect, choose Format - Text - Text Animation.
b .uno%3ARect c3 Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want.
13 .uno%3AVerticalText 14a Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
f .uno%3ADrawText e1 Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text.
16 .uno%3AVerticalCaption 1ab Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with vertical text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. Only available when Asian language support is enabled.
a .uno%3APie 17e Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag.
11 .uno%3ASpinButton 16 Creates a spin button.
c .uno%3ALabel 24 Creates a field for displaying text.
10 .uno%3ATimeField 15 Creates a time field.
13 .uno%3AMoreControls 20 Opens the More Controls toolbar.
10 .uno%3AScrollBar 14 Creates a scrollbar.
12 .uno%3AFileControl 2d Creates a button that enables file selection.
b .uno%3AGrid 34 Creates a table control to display a database table.
b .uno%3AEdit 13 Creates a text box.
12 .uno%3AImagebutton 27 Creates a button displayed as an image.
12 .uno%3ARadioButton 19 Creates an option button.
13 .uno%3AImageControl 4c Creates an image control. It can only be used to add images from a database.
10 .uno%3ADateField 15 Creates a date field.
15 .uno%3AFormattedField 1a Creates a formatted field.
f .uno%3ACheckBox 14 Creates a check box.
f .uno%3AGroupBox 33 Creates a frame to visually group several controls.
11 .uno%3APushbutton 16 Creates a push button.
13 .uno%3ANumericField 18 Creates a numeric field.
17 .uno%3AAutoControlFocus 107 If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first form control will be selected when you open the document. If the button is not activated, the text will be selected after opening. The Tab Order that you have specified determines which is the first form control.
f .uno%3AComboBox 14 Creates a combo box.
12 .uno%3ARadiobutton 19 Creates an option button.
f .uno%3ACombobox 14 Creates a combo box.
f .uno%3AGroupbox 33 Creates a frame to visually group several controls.
14 .uno%3ACurrencyField 19 Creates a currency field.
16 .uno%3AFormDesignTools 1e Opens the Form Design toolbar.
14 .uno%3ANavigationBar 19 Creates a navigation bar.
e .uno%3AListBox 13 Creates a list box.
d .uno%3AConfig 55 The Form Controls toolbar contains tools that you need to create an interactive form.
13 .uno%3APatternField 18 Creates a pattern field.
f .uno%3ACheckbox 14 Creates a check box.
11 .uno%3ASpinbutton 16 Creates a spin button.
14 .uno%3AConvertToEdit 34 The selected control is transformed into a text box.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCheckBox 35 The selected control is transformed into a check box.
17 .uno%3AConvertToNumeric 39 The selected control is transformed into a numeric field.
15 .uno%3AConvertToFixed 31 The selected control is transformed into a label.
18 .uno%3AConvertToCurrency 3a The selected control is transformed into a currency field.
18 .uno%3AChangeControlType 6a Calls a sub-menu from which you can choose a control type to replace the control selected in the document.
15 .uno%3AConvertToRadio 3a The selected control is transformed into an option button.
14 .uno%3AConvertToList 34 The selected control is transformed into a list box.
1c .uno%3AConvertToImageControl 3a The selected control is transformed into an image control.
18 .uno%3AConvertToImageBtn 39 The selected control is transformed into an image button.
16 .uno%3AConvertToButton 32 The selected control is transformed into a button.
17 .uno%3AConvertToPattern 39 The selected control is transformed into a pattern field.
1b .uno%3AConvertToFileControl 3a The selected control is transformed into a file selection.
19 .uno%3AConvertToFormatted 3b The selected control is transformed into a formatted field.
14 .uno%3AConvertToDate 36 The selected control is transformed into a date field.
15 .uno%3AConvertToCombo 35 The selected control is transformed into a combo box.
14 .uno%3AConvertToTime 36 The selected control is transformed into a time field.
18 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS_MORE 24 Calls the Show Columns dialogue box.
14 SVX_HID_FM_DELETECOL 26 Deletes the currently selected column.
12 SVX_HID_FM_HIDECOL 1a Hides the selected column.
14 SVX_HID_FM_CHANGECOL 60 Opens a sub-menu to select a data field to replace the data field selected in the table control.
16 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWALLCOLS 2a Click All if you want to show all columns.
14 SVX_HID_FM_INSERTCOL 49 Calls a sub-menu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_DLG_SHOWGRIDCOLUMNS%3A1 93 In the Show Columns dialogue box you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl (Mac: Command) key to select multiple entries.
13 SVX_HID_FM_SHOWCOLS 45 Calls a sub-menu from which you can choose the columns to show again.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_FM_PROPDLG_TABCTR 46 Opens a dialogue box for editing the properties of a selected control.
18 .uno%3AControlProperties 46 Opens a dialogue box for editing the properties of a selected control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WIDTH 21 Defines the width of the control.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SELECT_SEQ 3a Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMIN 33 Determines the earliest date that a user can enter.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MIN 31 Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_TIME 16 Sets the default time.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISUALEFFECT 66 Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3-D look (default) or a flat look.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VISIBLESIZE bb Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRICTFORMAT 5b If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FORMATKEY 5a Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDDEN_VALUE 3f You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_POSITION 55 Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ICONSIZE 52 Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation Bar should be small or large.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAME 9f On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABINDEX 75 The Tab order property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUESTEP 21 Determines spin button intervals.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ANCHOR_TYPE 2b Defines where the control will be anchored.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_NAVIGATION 54 Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_URL 59 Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an "Open document / web page" button.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_DATE 16 Sets the default date.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WHEEL_BEHAVIOR 165 Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TRISTATE 77 Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMAX 54 Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLED 69 If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user will be able to use the control field.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FONT 3a Select the font for the text that is in the control field.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEINCREMENT 5a Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the arrow icon on the scrollbar.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTISELECTION 36 Allows you to select more than one item in a list box.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LABEL 55 The Label property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SPINVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDERCOLOR 55 Specifies the border colour for controls that have the Border property set to "flat".
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRSYM_POSITION 65 Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HEIGHT 22 Defines the height of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_PRINTABLE 50 Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TABSTOP 55 The Tab stop property determines if a control field can be selected with the tab key.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ORIENTATION 50 Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_STRINGITEMLIST 105 Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_AUTOCOMPLETE 2d Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOWTHOUSANDSEP 1e Inserts a thousands separator.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPIN 6e The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LITERALMASK 76 Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MAXTEXTLEN 41 Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULTVALUE 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TOGGLE 126 Specifies if a Push Button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the spacebar while the the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in".
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_RECORDMARKER 73 Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ENABLE_VISIBLE 68 Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ROWHEIGHT 32 Specifies the row height of a table control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEMAX 54 Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURRENCYSYMBOL 3e You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_READONLY 49 Determines if the control is read-only (Yes) or if it can be edited (No).
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_WORDBREAK 24 Displays text on more than one line.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HIDEINACTIVESELECTION 6c Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when a the focus is no longer on a control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATEFORMAT 3f Here you can determine the desired format for the date readout.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONY 3e Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGEPOSITION 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_IMAGE_URL 6f The Graphics property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SYMBOLCOLOR 54 Specifies the colour for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HSCROLL 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCROLLVALUE_MAX 31 Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPURL 83 Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TAG 4d Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_BUTTON 73 The Default button property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_FILTERSORT 5f Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SCALEIMAGE 31 Resizes the image to fit the size of the control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT_DELAY 3d Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEDEFAULT 2d Sets the default value for the control field.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BORDER 62 Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat".
27 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DEFAULT_SCROLLVALUE 29 Sets the default value for the scrollbar.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_SCROLLBARS 37 Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPININCREMENT 58 Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FOCUSONCLICK 5e If you set this option to "Yes", the Push Button receives the focus when you click the button.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_HELPTEXT 5b Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REPEAT 8c Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button or a scrollbar repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BUTTONTYPE 51 The Action property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXTTYPE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALIGN 4f Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATIONBAR 59 Specifies whether to display the navigation bar on the lower border of the table control.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SPINVALUE_MIN 67 You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EFFECTIVEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BLOCKINCREMENT 5e Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EDITMASK 75 Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MULTILINE cf Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TARGET_FRAME 6b Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ECHO_CHAR b5 If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII-code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SHOW_RECORDACTIONS 50 Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation Bar control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_POSITIONX 3e Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VALUEMAX 68 Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BACKGROUNDCOLOR 30 Sets the background colour of the control field.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEMIN 32 Determines the minimum time that a user can enter.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TIMEFORMAT 37 You can define the desired format for the time display.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLLABEL 32 Specifies the source for the label of the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINECOUNT 8d Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the drop-down list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the "Drop-down" option.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LINEEND_FORMAT 5e For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DECIMAL_ACCURACY 4c Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_TEXT 34 Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DROPDOWN 43 Specifies whether the combo box should drop-down (Yes) or not (No).
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_FILTERPROPOSAL ff While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialogue box. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CONTROLSOURCE 49 Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_EMPTY_IS_NULL c9 Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to Yes, an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to No, any input will be treated as-is without any conversion.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_REFVALUE d3 You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field.
26 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CELL_EXCHANGE_TYPE 4a Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUND_CELL 84 Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell content.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCETYPE 3e Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LISTSOURCE b3 With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_LIST_CELL_RANGE 5a Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_UNCHECKEDREFVALUE 112 Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_BOUNDCOLUMN a9 Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.
1a EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CHANGED 82 The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEENTERED 4c The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSLOST 4b The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus.
18 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYUP 5d The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_FOCUSGAINED 51 The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ACTIONPERFORMED 3a The Execute action event occurs when an action is started.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_TEXTCHANGED 52 The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify text in an input field.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ITEMSTATECHANGED 58 The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEDRAGGED 65 The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEEXITED 50 The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEPRESSED 6f The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSEMOVED 41 The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_KEYTYPED 5b The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_MOUSERELEASED 71 The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control.
29 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEACTIONPERFORMED 4d This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control.
15 .uno%3AFormProperties 66 In this dialogue box you can specify, among others, the data source and the events for the whole form.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_ENCODING 32 Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SUBMIT_METHOD 40 Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONING 53 The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer is changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_SUBMITTED 40 The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEPARAMETER 63 The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADED 49 TheWhen reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RESETTED 3d The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_CONFIRMDELETE 4b The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data is deleted from the form.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ERROROCCURRED 58 The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_AFTERUPDATE 66 The After update event occurs after the changed control content has been written into the data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_ROWCHANGE 58 The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_POSITIONED 60 The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_RELOADING 3e The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded.
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVERESETTED 37 The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset.
1b EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADED 73 The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_UNLOADING 67 The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_LOADED 46 The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_EVT_APPROVEROWCHANGE 4b The Before record action event occurs before the current record is changed.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_EDITS 27 Determines if the data can be modified.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_NAVIGATION 4d Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used.
1d EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATAENTRY 70 Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No).
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_MASTERFIELDS 82 If you create a sub-form, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronisation between parent and sub-form.
19 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CYCLE 3f Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_DELETIONS 26 Determines if the data can be deleted.
23 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ALLOW_ADDITIONS 20 Determines if data can be added.
1f EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SLAVEFIELDS 6c If you create a sub-form, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_DATASOURCE 37 Defines the data source to which the form should refer.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_SORT_CRITERIA 9c Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCE ff Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL statement. Before you enter the content you have to define the exact type in Content type.
24 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_CURSORSOURCETYPE 8a Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement.
25 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_ESCAPE_PROCESSING 46 Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analysed by %PRODUCTNAME.
15 HID_TABORDER_CONTROLS 76 Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom.
10 .uno%3ATabDialog 83 In the Tab Order dialogue box you can modify the order in which control fields acquire the focus when the user presses the tab key.
f .uno%3AAddField 55 Opens a window in which you can select a database field to add to the form or report.
11 SVX_HID_FIELD_SEL 88 The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties.
1e .uno%3ASwitchControlDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
1d .uno%3ASwitchXFormsDesignMode b1 Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls.
15 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_HIDDEN bc Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not visible on screen and is hidden from the user. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form.
e SVX_HID_FM_NEW 6f Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator.
16 SVX_HID_FORM_NAVIGATOR 68 The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields.
1a .uno%3AShowPropertyBrowser 3a Starts the Properties dialogue box for the selected entry.
13 SVX_HID_FM_NEW_FORM 23 Creates a new form in the document.
15 .uno%3AShowFmExplorer 85 Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and sub-forms of the current document with their respective controls.
18 SVX_HID_FM_RENAME_OBJECT 1c Renames the selected object.
11 SVX_HID_FM_DELETE 1b Deletes the selected entry.
13 .uno%3AOpenReadOnly 3a Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited.
11 .uno%3AUseWizards 51 Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control.
15 .uno%3ADesignerDialog 70 Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles and Formatting window, in which you can assign and organise Styles.
11 .uno%3AStyleApply 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
16 .uno%3AStyleApplyState 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
15 SVX_HID_STYLE_LISTBOX 57 Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object.
13 .uno%3ACharFontName 4d Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly.
11 .uno%3AFontHeight 5d Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionLeftToRight 2f Specifies the horizontal direction of the text.
1f .uno%3ATextdirectionTopToBottom 2d Specifies the vertical direction of the text.
16 .uno%3ADecrementIndent 92 Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position.
16 .uno%3AIncrementIndent 90 Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position.
10 .uno%3ABackColor 150 Applies the current highlight colour to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlighting icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlighting icon again. To change the highlight colour, click the arrow next to the Highlighting icon, and then click the colour that you want.
16 .uno%3ABackgroundColor ad Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background colour for a paragraph. The colour is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceIncrease 5f Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
18 .uno%3AParaspaceDecrease 5f Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph.
15 .uno%3ASetBorderStyle 76 Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, with which you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object.
10 .uno%3ALineStyle 60 Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, with which you can modify the border line style.
15 .uno%3AFrameLineColor 89 Click the Line Colour (of the border) icon to open the Border Colour toolbar, which enables you to change the border colour of an object.
17 .uno%3AToggleAnchorType 2f Allows you to switch between anchoring options.
14 .uno%3AOptimizeTable 57 Opens a toolbar that contains functions for optimising the rows and columns in a table.
13 .uno%3ALineEndStyle 69 Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line.
1d .uno%3AToggleObjectRotateMode 1c Rotates the selected object.
12 .uno%3AObjectAlign 2b Modifies the alignment of selected objects.
13 .uno%3AOutlineRight 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3ADecrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph down one level in a numbering or bullets hierarchy.
12 .uno%3AOutlineLeft 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
15 .uno%3AIncrementLevel 50 Moves the selected paragraph up one level in the numbering or bullets hierarchy.
d .uno%3AMoveUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
10 .uno%3AOutlineUp 39 Positions the selected paragraph before the one above it.
f .uno%3AMoveDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
12 .uno%3AOutlineDown 38 Positions the selected paragraph after the one below it.
14 .uno%3ADefaultBullet 5b Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs.
e .uno%3AOpenUrl 9e Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document.
a SID_RELOAD 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
d .uno%3AReload 3a Replaces the current document with the last saved version.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TEXT_SELECTION_MODE d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
e .uno%3AEditDoc 3b Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table.
15 .uno%3ASelectTextMode d6 You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink.
11 .uno%3ADSBEditDoc 3d Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off.
b .uno%3AStop 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
f SID_BROWSE_STOP 73 Click to interrupt the current loading process, Ctrl-click (Mac: Command-click) to interrupt all loading processes.
18 .uno%3AExportDirectToPDF 50 Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialogue box is shown.
15 .uno%3AStatusGetTitle 42 Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document.
18 .uno%3AStatusGetPosition 7d Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number.
1a SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_NAME 2a Assigns a name to an Internet URL or file.
19 SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_URL 55 Allows you to either type a URL, or insert a URL from a document using drag-and-drop.
13 .uno%3ASetHyperlink 3c Inserts a hyperlink from the current URL into your document.
1c SVX_HID_OFA_HYPERLINK_TARGET 36 Specifies the target frame type for the specified URL.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CANCEL_BTN 27 Closes the dialogue box without saving.
16 .uno%3ARemoveHyperlink 2a Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text.
1c .uno%3AOpenHyperlinkOnCursor 30 Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser.
14 .uno%3AEditHyperlink 21 Opens the Hyperlink dialogue box.
16 .uno%3AHyperlinkDialog 44 Opens a dialogue box that enables you to create and edit hyperlinks.
1b CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_RESET_BTN 3f Resets the entries in the dialogue box to their original state.
1c CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_CHOICECTRL 2c Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted.
18 CUI_HID_ICCDIALOG_OK_BTN 22 Applies the data to your document.
1c .uno%3ACopyHyperlinkLocation 20 Copies the URL to the clipboard.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
38 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
43 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_FTP 19 Creates an FTP hyperlink.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_APPLY 45 Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialogue box.
36 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1f CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_CLOSE 6a Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialogue box.
48 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ARB_LINKTYP_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ABTN_BROWSE 3d Opens a web browser, into which you can load the desired URL.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACBX_ANONYMOUS 3d Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_INET_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
1e CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MARKWND_TREE 48 Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to.
3b cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_TEXT 1f Enter a name for the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
34 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ALB_FORM 43 Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_INDICATION 3f Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink.
3b cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_SCRIPT 8d Opens the Assign Macro dialogue box, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes.
3a cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
3d cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ACB_FRAME c3 Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window.
36 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_LOGIN 41 Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_INTERNET 1a Creates an http hyperlink.
37 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_INTERNET%3AED_PASSWD 3f Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_MAIL_PATH 67 Specifies the full URL of the addressee, in the form mailto:name@provider.com or news:group.server.com.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3AED_SUBJECT 57 Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ABTN_ADRESSBOOK 27 Hides or shows the data source browser.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_MAIL%3ARB_LINKTYP_NEWS 28 Assigns a news address to the hyperlink.
16 CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_MAIL 36 Assigns the specified e-mail address to the hyperlink.
3f cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_BROWSE 2a Opens the Target in Document dialogue box.
1a CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
3b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3AED_TARGET_DOC 4c Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path.
41 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_DOCUMENT%3ABTN_FILEOPEN 3c Opens the Open dialogue box, in which you can select a file.
19 CUI_HID_HYPERDLG_DOC_PATH a3 Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.
45 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ALB_DOCUMENT_TYPES 2d Specifies the file type for the new document.
3f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3AED_PATH_NEWDOC 4c Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink.
42 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITNOW 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
1d CUI_HID_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT 4e Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing.
42 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ABTN_CREATE 43 Opens the Select Path dialogue box, in which you can select a path.
44 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_HYPERLINK_NEWDOCUMENT%3ARB_EDITLATER 48 Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened.
d .uno%3APageUp 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
13 .uno%3APreviousPage 30 Moves back to the previous page in the document.
f .uno%3APageDown 30 Moves forwards to the next page in the document.
f .uno%3ANextPage 30 Moves forwards to the next page in the document.
15 .uno%3AGoToStartOfDoc 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
10 .uno%3AFirstPage 28 Moves to the first page of the document.
13 .uno%3AGoToEndOfDoc 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ALastPage 27 Moves to the last page of the document.
f .uno%3ACloseWin 1a Closes the current window.
22 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_EDIT_DATABASE 2d Opens the selected database file for editing.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_ADMINISTRATE c1 Opens a dialogue box to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialogue box opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialogue box.
18 .uno%3ADSBrowserExplorer 36 Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_RENAME_ENTRY c5 To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled.
1e DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_CLOSECONN 6a Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialogue box.
f .uno%3ASortDown 39 Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order.
11 .uno%3AAutoFilter 4f Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field.
17 .uno%3ARemoveFilterSort 51 Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_REFRESH_REBUILDVIEW 6b Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table.
e .uno%3ARefresh 1d Refreshes the displayed data.
13 .uno%3ASbaBrwInsert 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
39 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_COLNMS 5a Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns.
36 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TBL_DB_COLUMN 42 Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_TO 44 Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ONE_FROM 45 Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TABLE 50 Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_HEADL_EMPTY 32 Inserts an empty heading line into the text table.
36 sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ACB_TABLE_HEADON 4d Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table.
3a sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_DB 1d Accepts the database formats.
39 sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_TO 43 Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_AUTOFMT 7f Opens the AutoFormat dialogue box, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table.
3b sw%3AImageButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3AIB_DBCOL_ALL_FROM 3e Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3APB_TBL_FORMAT 84 Opens the Table Format dialogue box, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width.
37 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
3b sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_DBFMT_FROM_USR 63 Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted.
32 sw%3AListBox%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ALB_TABLE_COL 3c Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document.
34 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_AP_INSERT_DB_SEL%3ARB_AS_TEXT 4d Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
28 .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FInsertContent 4b Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records.
11 .uno%3AFilterCrit 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_FILTERCRIT 28 Allows you to set the filtering options.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
1f .uno%3ADataFilterStandardFilter 3b Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE2 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND1 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD3 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
2a sc%3AComboBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3AED_VAL1 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
34 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHEREFIELD1 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND3 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP2 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_FIELD2 4d Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOND3 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_COND2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3ALB_WHERECOMP2 6f Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_FILTERCRIT%3AET_WHEREVALUE3 26 Specifies a value to filter the field.
28 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCDLG_FILTER%3ALB_OP1 53 For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR.
10 .uno%3AOrderCrit 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
1a DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ORDERCRIT 31 Specifies the sort criteria for the data display.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_TEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
13 CUI_HID_SEARCH_CASE 54 Specifies that upper- and lower-case are taken into consideration during the search.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_CLOSE 63 Closes the dialogue box. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME.
19 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BTN_SEARCH 1d Starts or cancels the search.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_POSITION 45 Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SINGLEFIELD 28 Searches through a specified data field.
10 .uno%3ARecSearch 23 Searches database tables and forms.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ALB_FORM 46 Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNULL 39 Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data.
1d CUI_HID_SEARCH_FIELDSELECTION 28 Searches through a specified data field.
3f cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORNOTNULL 36 Specifies that fields will be found that contain data.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_BACKWARD 63 Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record.
16 CUI_HID_SEARCH_REGULAR 22 Searches with regular expressions.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_STARTOVER 78 Restarts the search. A forwards search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_FORMATTER 57 Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document.
18 CUI_HID_SEARCH_ALLFIELDS 1c Searches through all fields.
17 CUI_HID_SEARCH_WILDCARD 27 Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_SEARCHFORM%3ARB_SEARCHFORTEXT 3c Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list.
11 .uno%3AFormFilter 4d Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria.
13 .uno%3AFormFiltered 3f Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table.
15 .uno%3AViewFormAsGrid 39 Activates an additional table view when in the form view.
2d .uno%3ADataSourceBrowser%2FDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
1c .uno%3ADSBDocumentDataSource 57 Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document.
14 .uno%3ASbaExecuteSql 31 Runs the SQL query and displays the query result.
13 .uno%3ADBClearQuery 3f Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window.
24 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_TABLELIST 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
20 DBACCESS_HID_JOINSH_ADDTAB_CLOSE 23 Closes the Add Tables dialogue box.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_QUERIES 13 Shows only queries.
39 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3ARB_CASE_TABLES 12 Shows only tables.
f .uno%3AAddTable 3b Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_JOIN_TABADD%3APB_ADDTABLE 25 Inserts the currently selected table.
19 .uno%3ADBChangeDesignMode 36 Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query.
13 .uno%3ASbaNativeSql 8c In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source.
16 .uno%3ADBViewFunctions 5c Displays the "Function" row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window.
17 .uno%3ADBViewTableNames 3f Displays the "Table" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
14 .uno%3ADBViewAliases 3f Displays the "Alias" row in the lower part of the Query Design.
17 .uno%3ADBDistinctValues 66 Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT.
13 .uno%3ASelectObject 35 Allows you to select objects in the current document.
11 .uno%3ASourceView 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
11 SW_HID_SOURCEVIEW 9b Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document.
14 .uno%3APageStyleName 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
13 .uno%3ALayoutStatus 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
16 .uno%3AStatusPageStyle 65 Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style.
10 .uno%3AStateZoom 2f Specifies the current page display zoom factor.
11 .uno%3AInsertMode 5d Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.
14 .uno%3ASelectionMode 7b Displays the current selection mode. You can switch between STD = Standard, EXT = Extend, ADD = Add, BLK = Block selection.
1a .uno%3AStatusSelectionMode 7b Displays the current selection mode. You can switch between STD = Standard, EXT = Extend, ADD = Add, BLK = Block selection.
13 .uno%3AModifyStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
15 .uno%3AModifiedStatus 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
f .uno%3AModified 9a If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status Bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents.
12 .uno%3ACurrentTime 1a Displays the current time.
12 .uno%3ACurrentDate 1a Displays the current date.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterToolbox 84 This icon on the Picture bar opens the Graphic Filter bar, from which you can select various filters to use on the selected picture.
4f cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_POSTER%3ADLG_FILTERPOSTER_NUM_POSTER 44 Specifies the number of colours to which the image is to be reduced.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_CBX_EDGES 2f Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object.
4d cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_WIDTH 2a Defines the width of the individual tiles.
1c .uno%3AGraphicFilterSolarize cb Opens a dialogue box for defining solarisation. Solarisation refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colours become partly inverted.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterRelief 2d Displays a dialogue box for creating reliefs.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterInvert 88 Inverts the colour values of a colour image, or the brightness values of a greyscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSobel 7f Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colours are suppressed.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterMosaic 47 Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same colour.
1f .uno%3AGraphicFilterRemoveNoise 2a Removes noise by applying a median filter.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPoster 3f Opens a dialogue box to determine the number of poster colours.
4e cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_MOSAIC%3ADLG_FILTERMOSAIC_MTR_HEIGHT 2b Defines the height of the individual tiles.
19 .uno%3AGraphicFilterSepia a2 All pixels are set to their grey values, and then the green and blue colour channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red colour channel is not changed.
4f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_CBX_INVERT 45 Specifies whether the pixels to be solarised are also to be inverted.
1b .uno%3AGraphicFilterSharpen 32 Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterSmooth 39 Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.
55 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SOLARIZE%3ADLG_FILTERSOLARIZE_MTR_THRESHOLD 5b Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarised.
1a .uno%3AGraphicFilterPopart 26 Converts an image to a pop-art format.
4b cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_GRFFILTER_DLG_SEPIA%3ADLG_FILTERSEPIA_MTR_SEPIA 86 Defines the intensity of ageing, in percent. At 0% you see the grey values of all pixels. At 100% only the red colour channel remains.
f .uno%3AGrafMode a2 Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object.
e .uno%3AGrafRed 56 Specifies the proportion of red RGB colour components for the selected graphic object.
10 .uno%3AGrafGreen 58 Specifies the proportion of green RGB colour components for the selected graphic object.
f .uno%3AGrafBlue 50 Specifies the proportion of blue RGB colour components for the selected graphic.
14 .uno%3AGrafLuminance 39 Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafContrast 3e Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image.
10 .uno%3AGrafGamma 72 Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values.
17 .uno%3AGrafTransparence 31 Specifies the transparency in the graphic object.
13 .uno%3AGrafAttrCrop 76 Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed.
b .uno%3ACrop 3b Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.block-arc 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.diamond 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.ellipse 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.trapezoid 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3ABasicShapes 57 Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cross 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.ring 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ABasicShapes.cube 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3ABasicShapes.pentagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3ABasicShapes.isosceles-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3ABasicShapes.can 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.paper 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ABasicShapes.right-triangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.hexagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-quadrat 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1c .uno%3ABasicShapes.rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ABasicShapes.frame 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ABasicShapes.round-rectangle 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ABasicShapes.octagon 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ABasicShapes.parallelogram 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ABasicShapes.circle-pie 5b Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3AArrowShapes.s-sharped-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3AArrowShapes.chevron 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.notched-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-down--arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.circular-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.pentagon-right 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-down-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.down-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
12 .uno%3AArrowShapes 55 Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
1d .uno%3AArrowShapes.left-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
24 .uno%3AArrowShapes.split-round-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AArrowShapes.striped-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AArrowShapes.up-right-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.quad-arrow-callout 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AArrowShapes.corner-right-arrow 59 Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.round-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-3 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-2 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.line-callout-1 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.rectangular-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3ACalloutShapes 51 Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
22 .uno%3ACalloutShapes.cloud-callout 55 Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
14 .uno%3AColorSettings 4c With the Colour toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-punched-tape 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-summing-junction 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-predefined-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-stored-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes 52 Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
2d .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-input 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-document 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2a .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-extract 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sequential-access 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-card 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-or 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-manual-operation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
36 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-direct-access-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
32 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-alternate-process 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-merge 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
29 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-decision 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2c .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-preparation 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
31 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-internal-storage 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-magnetic-disk 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
26 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-delay 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-sort 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-display 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
28 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-collate 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
33 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-off-page-connector 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2b .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-terminator 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
2e .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-multidocument 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
25 .uno%3AFlowChartShapes.flowchart-data 56 Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3AFontworkGalleryFloater 64 The icon opens the Fontwork Gallery from which you can insert graphical text art into your document.
17 .uno%3AFormatPaintbrush 93 First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.
11 .uno%3AStarShapes 5a Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star12 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
23 .uno%3AStarShapes.horizontal-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.star24 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star4 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
16 .uno%3AStarShapes.bang 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star8 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3AStarShapes.concave-star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3AStarShapes.signet 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star6 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3AStarShapes.vertical-scroll 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1b .uno%3AStarShapes.doorplate 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3AStarShapes.star5 60 Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.bracket-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
20 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
13 .uno%3ASymbolShapes 56 Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.diamond-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.cloud 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.quad-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.flower 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.moon 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-bracket 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
17 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.sun 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.brace-pair 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.puzzle 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.lightning 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
21 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.octagon-bevel 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1a .uno%3ASymbolShapes.smiley 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1f .uno%3ASymbolShapes.right-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1e .uno%3ASymbolShapes.left-brace 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
1d .uno%3ASymbolShapes.forbidden 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
19 .uno%3ASymbolShapes.heart 5c Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape.
18 SFX2_HID_HELP_TABCONTROL 62 The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks.
23 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BOOKMARKS 20 Adds this page to your bookmarks
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 4e Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list.
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_LISTBOX 5d The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules.
2c sfx2%3APushButton%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3APB_FIND 2d Finds the next occurrence of the search term.
11 .uno%3AHelpOnHelp 27 Provides an overview of the Help system
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_BACKWARDS 3b Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor.
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_INDEX 23 Hides and shows the navigation pane
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_PRINT 17 Prints the current page
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WHOLEWORDS 1a Finds complete words only.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_MATCHCASE 3a Distinguishes between upper-case text and lower-case text.
22 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_BACKWARD 1f Moves back to the previous page
26 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_SEARCHDIALOG 29 Opens the Find on this page dialogue box.
30 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_SEARCH%3ACB_WRAPAROUND 4e Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor.
21 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_FORWARD 1f Moves forwards to the next page
1f SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOXITEM_START 31 Moves to the first page of the current Help topic
15 SFX2_HID_HELP_TOOLBOX 48 The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system
2a sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3ACB_INDEX 45 Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index.
31 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_INDEX%3APB_OPEN_INDEX 24 Click to display the selected topic.
2b sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ALB_RESULT 6a Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry.
33 sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_OPEN_SEARCH 28 Displays the entry selected in the list.
2e sfx2%3APushButton%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3APB_SEARCH 40 Click to start a full-text search for the term that you entered.
2c sfx2%3AComboBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3AED_SEARCH 3d Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive.
2f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_FULLWORDS 71 Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word that you entered. Incomplete words will not be found.
2b sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_HELP_SEARCH%3ACB_SCOPE 4a Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term.
1c SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_OPEN 22 displays the selected help subject
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_DELETE 1d deletes the bookmark selected
36 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_HELP_ADDBOOKMARK%3AED_BOOKMARK_TITLE 58 Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_BOOKMARKS_RENAME 3f opens a dialogue box for entering another name for the bookmark
31 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_HELP_BOOKMARKS%3ALB_BOOKMARKS 7c Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu.
1e SFX2_HID_HELP_TABPAGE_CONTENTS 56 Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltUp 32 Tilts the selected object upwards by five degrees.
1f .uno%3AExtrusionLightingFloater 24 Opens the Extrusion Lighting window.
17 .uno%3AExtrusion3DColor 23 Opens the Extrusion Colour toolbar.
19 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltRight 30 Tilts the selected object right by five degrees.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltLeft 2f Tilts the selected object left by five degrees.
18 .uno%3AExtrusionTiltDown 34 Tilts the selected object downwards by five degrees.
1e .uno%3AExtrusionSurfaceFloater 23 Opens the Extrusion Surface window.
16 .uno%3AExtrusionToggle 3d Switches the 3-D effects on and off for the selected objects.
3c svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVX_MDLG_EXTRUSION_DEPTH%3AMTR_DEPTH 19 Enter an extrusion depth.
20 .uno%3AExtrusionDirectionFloater 25 Opens the Extrusion Direction window.
1c .uno%3AExtrusionDepthFloater 21 Opens the Extrusion Depth window.
1a SVX_HID_POPUP_LINEEND_CTRL 13 Select a direction.
14 .uno%3AAutoPilotMenu 63 Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more.
1c EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDNEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.letter.CallWizard%3Fstart 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDPREV 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_BACK 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotLetter 28 Starts the wizard for a letter template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_CREATE 68 According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disc.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZARD_NEXT 3a Saves the current settings and continues to the next page.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_PREVIOUS 46 Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKBUSINESSPAPER 93 Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVATELETTER 34 Specifies that you want to create a personal letter.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTBUSINESSLETTER 3d Specifies that you want to create a business letter template.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVOFFICIALSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTPRIVOFFICIALLETTER 3b Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 2b Select the design for your letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE1 45 Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERFOOTER 6f Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYLOGO 66 Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMFOOTERHEIGHT 81 Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKCOMPANYRECEIVER a3 Specifies that your own address is already imprinted in small size above the area of the recipient's address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSWIDTH 20 Defines the width of the object.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE2 57 Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKPAPERCOMPANYADDRESS 6e Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSX 33 Sets the object distance from the left page margin.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMADDRESSY 32 Sets the object distance from the top page margin.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_NUMLOGOHEIGHT 21 Defines the height of the object.
28 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEADDRESSRECEIVER 3c Includes a small size return address on the letter template.
1f WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEFOOTER 29 Includes a footer on the letter template.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTSALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
1d WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSELOGO 27 Includes a logo on the letter template.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTLETTERNORM 4b Select a country in order to use a typical letter layout from that country.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESUBJECT 2f Includes a subject line on the letter template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESIGNS 4c Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE3 38 Defines the items to be included in the letter template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSESALUTATION 56 Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEBENDMARKS 2b Includes fold marks on the letter template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_LSTGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKUSEGREETING 59 Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERCITY 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTATE_TEXT 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
20 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERNAME 21 Specifies the name of the sender.
29 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 48 Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERSTREET 2b Specifies the street address of the sender.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE4 2f Specifies the sender and recipient information.
26 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 3e Address database fields are inserted into the letter template.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERDEFINE 33 Use the address data from the following text boxes.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 4f Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialogue box.
24 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTSENDERPOSTCODE 29 Specifies the address data of the sender.
25 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 3c Select this option to suppress the footer on the first page.
1c WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTFOOTER 24 Enter the text for the footer lines.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE5 39 Specifies the information to include in the footer space.
27 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 2e Includes page numbers in your letter template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTCREATELETTER 5c Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template.
1a WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_CMDPATH 68 Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_TXTTEMPLATENAME 2d Specifies the title of the document template.
21 WIZARDS_HID_LTRWIZ_OPTMAKECHANGES 31 Saves the template and keeps it open for editing.
13 SW_HID_LETTER_PAGE6 50 Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_CREATE b0 According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX".
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_NEXT 8a The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page.
1a WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZARD_BACK c8 Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.fax.CallWizard%3Fstart 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
13 .uno%3AAutoPilotFax 1b Opens the wizard for faxes.
1b WIZARDS_HID_LSTPRIVATESTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE1 27 Defines the style of your fax document.
20 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTPRIVATEFAX 29 Creates a fax template for a private fax.
23 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_LSTBUSINESSSTYLE 1f Specifies the predefined style.
21 WIZARDS_HID_FAXWIZ_OPTBUSINESSFAX 30 Creates a fax template for a business-style fax.
19 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESUBJECT 18 Includes a company logo.
1a WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEGREETING 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1c WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSESALUTATION 16 Includes a date field.
19 WIZARDS_HID_LSTSALUTATION 46 Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTREET 12 Includes a footer.
20 WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERPLACEHOLDER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERNAME 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE2 29 Specifies the fax elements to be printed.
18 WIZARDS_HID_CHKUSEFOOTER 3f Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box.
17 WIZARDS_HID_LSTGREETING 18 Includes a subject line.
1b WIZARDS_HID_OPTSENDERDEFINE 3b Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE3 3a Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax.
1c WIZARDS_HID_FILETEMPLATEPATH 45 Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document.
18 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERFAX 1e Enter the sender address data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_TXTTEMPLATENAME 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
19 WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERCITY 82 Select this option to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document.
1e WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERNEXTPAGES 1e Enter the sender address data.
20 WIZARDS_HID_CHKFOOTERPAGENUMBERS 1e Enter the sender address data.
1f WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERDATABASE 1e Enter the sender address data.
1a WIZARDS_HID_TXTSENDERSTATE 84 Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data.
15 WIZARDS_HID_TXTFOOTER 1e Enter the sender address data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_OPTRECEIVERPLACEHOLDER 1e Enter the sender address data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE4 1a Specifies the footer data.
10 SW_HID_FAX_PAGE5 27 Defines the template name and location.
38 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.agenda.CallWizard%3Fstart 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
16 .uno%3AAutoPilotAgenda 38 Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_LIST_PAGEDESIGN 29 Select the page design from the list box.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE1 27 Specifies a page design for the agenda.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_1_CHK_MINUTES 4d Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TITLE 23 Specifies the title of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_DATE 22 Specifies the date of the meeting.
20 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_LOCATION 26 Specifies the location of the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE2 3d Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_2_TXT_TIME 22 Specifies the time of the meeting.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE3 3e Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_READ 2e Specifies whether to print a Please read line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_BRING 2f Specifies whether to print a Please bring line.
1d WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_NOTES 28 Specifies whether to print a Notes line.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_3_CHK_MEETING_TYPE 34 Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_FACILITATOR 49 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the chairperson.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_ATTENDEES 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the attendees.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_NOTETAKER 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the secretary.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_OBSERVERS 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the observers.
27 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_RESOURCEPERSONS 50 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the facility personnel.
22 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_TIMEKEEPER 47 Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the moderator.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE4 30 Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_4_CHK_CALLED_BY 5b Specifies whether to print a line in which you can enter the person who called the meeting.
1c WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_DOWN 21 Moves the current topic row down.
1a WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_UP 1f Moves the current topic row up.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE5 3a Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_REMOVE 1e Removes the current topic row.
25 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_RESPONSIBLE_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1f WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_TOPIC_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
1e WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_BTN_INSERT 34 Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row.
21 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_5_TXT_MINUTES_1 52 Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics.
23 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_MAKECHANGES 53 Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_BTN_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
13 SW_HID_AGENDA_PAGE6 36 Choose the title and location for the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_OPT_CREATEAGENDA 5f Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATENAME 2a Specifies the name of the agenda template.
24 WIZARDS_HID_AGWIZ_6_TXT_TEMPLATEPATH 4c Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_LAST 44 Returns to the previous step without deleting your current settings.
24 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ABUT_NEXT 34 Accepts the new settings and moves to the next page.
c slot%3A10425 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
1d .uno%3AAutoPilotPresentations 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
16 .uno%3ANewPresentation 7f Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs.
18 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_OPEN 10a Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under %PRODUCTNAME - Paths in the Options dialogue box. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next.
29 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_ASS%3APB_PAGE1_OPEN 30 Click Open to see a file selection dialogue box.
26 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_STARTWITH 71 Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_EMPTY 23 Creates a new (empty) presentation.
1d SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_TEMPLATES 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_OPEN 34 Displays a list of previously created presentations.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE1_TEMPLATE 3d Opens a list box containing various modifiable presentations.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE1 44 Specifies the presentation type and allows you to select a template.
1a SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_REGION 3a Lists the available template categories for presentations.
24 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PREVIEW 36 Specifies that templates appear in the preview window.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM2 2c Creates a presentation to be used as slides.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM4 34 Creates a presentation that can be printed on paper.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM3 3d Creates a presentation to be used as overhead transparencies.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM5 2e Uses the original page format of the template.
21 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGETEMPLATES 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE2_MEDIUM1 2c Creates a computer screen presentation only.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE2_LAYOUT 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE2 5e Allows you to select a slide design for the presentation you selected on page 1 of the Wizard.
27 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_SPEED 1c Determines the effect speed.
27 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE3_LOGO 5f Specifies whether to display the $[officename] logo during the pause between each presentation.
28 sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ALB_PAGE3_EFFECT 2a Specifies an effect for your presentation.
2a sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_LIVE 60 The Default option runs the presentation as a full screen presentation with the specified speed.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE3 46 Assigns special effects to your presentation and determines its speed.
2a sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_BREAK 2c Defines the pause between each presentation.
29 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_ASS%3ATMF_PAGE3_TIME 2f Defines the duration of each presentation page.
2b sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_ASS%3ARB_PAGE3_KIOSK 49 Runs the presentation automatically, and restarts it again after a break.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKTOPIC 29 Specifies the topic of your presentation.
37 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKINFORMATION 66 Use this field for further thoughts and ideas that you would like to cover later in your presentation.
27 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_ASS%3AEDT_PAGE4_ASKNAME 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE4 30 Specifies your name or the name of your company.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_ASS%3ACB_PAGE5_SUMMARY 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
19 SD_HID_SD_AUTOPILOT_PAGE5 2f Creates a summary of all presentation contents.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDFINISH 39 Click to create the form without answering further pages.
1a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_DIALOG 28 Activates the Wizard for creating forms.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN_PK_SELECTED 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_LBTABLES 42 Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2c WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_DOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDS 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
2d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
17 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_DOC_UP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP_PK_SELECTED 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_FIELDSSELECTED 2d Displays the fields that are in the new form.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEDOWN 3c Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDFILTERREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
1e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSAVAILABLE 47 Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_MASTER_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEUP 3a Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTSELECTMANUALLY 3e Click to add a sub-form based on a manual selection of fields.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTONEXISTINGRELATION 36 Click to add a sub-form based on an existing relation.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_lstRELATIONS 33 Select the relation on which the sub-form is based.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKCREATESUBFORM 19 Select to add a sub-form.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_FIELDSSELECTED 3e Displays all fields that will be included in the new sub-form.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_SUB_LBTABLES 45 Specifies the table or query for which the sub-form is to be created.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK2 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK1 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK4 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTMASTERLINK3 7a Select the main form field that is joined to the sub-form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK4 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK3 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK2 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LINKER_LSTSLAVELINK1 7a Select the sub-form field that is joined to the main form field, which you select from the list box next to this list box.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNLEFT 1c The labels are left-aligned.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPLABELED 47 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTOPJUSTIFIED 31 Arranges the labels above the corresponding data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDTABLESTYLE 2d Aligns the database fields in a tabular form.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDLEFTLABELED 51 Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDALIGNRIGHT 1d The labels are right-aligned.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOMODIFICATION 20 Select to disallow editing data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNOADDITION 23 Select to disallow adding new data.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTDISPLAYALLDATA 4f Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTNEWDATAONLY 37 Creates a form that is only used for entering new data.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CHKNODELETION 21 Select to disallow deleting data.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_LSTSTYLES 26 Specifies the page style for the form.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDSIMPLEBORDER 2b Specifies that the field borders look flat.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMD3DBORDER 31 Specifies that the field borders have a 3-D look.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_CMDNOBORDER 29 Specifies that the fields have no border.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTMODIFYFORM 3f Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_OPTWORKWITHFORM 4a Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGFORM_TXTPATH 1f Specifies the name of the form.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_DIALOG 1d Select the report properties.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DOCUMENT_CREATE_REPWIZ 2a Activates the wizard for creating reports.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVESELECTED 4d Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSAVAILABLE 4a Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_LBTABLES 40 Select the table or query for which the report is to be created.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDREMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_FIELDSSELECTED 38 Displays all fields that are included in the new report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_1_CMDMOVEALL 42 Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_6 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_5 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_4 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_3 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_2 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_6_TXTTITLE_1 94 Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_PREGROUPINGDEST b4 Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_CMDUNGROUP 4a Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_2_GROUPING c6 Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND1 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND1 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND2 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND4 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND2 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT4 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT1 33 Select the first field by which to sort the report.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTDESCEND3 2d Sorts the field contents in descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND3 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_OPTASCEND4 2c Sorts the field contents in ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT2 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_3_SORT3 37 Select an additional field by which to sort the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PAGELAYOUT 8a Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_PORTRAIT 33 Selects a portrait page orientation for the report.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_LANDSCAPE 34 Selects a landscape page orientation for the report.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_DATALAYOUT 65 Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTSTATDOCUMENT 89 Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTEDITTEMPLATE 44 When you click Create, the report will be saved and opened for edit.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_4_TITLE 43 Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTDYNTEMPLATE 6f Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGREPORT_5_OPTUSETEMPLATE 30 When you click Finish, the report will be saved.
33 sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DEL_DESIGN 31 Deletes the selected design from the design list.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_OLD_DESIGN 81 Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE1 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_NEW_DESIGN 35 Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard.
2d sd%3AListBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE1_DESIGNS 1e Displays all existing designs.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_PERL 3d Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts.
34 sd%3ATimeField%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_DURATION_TMF 32 Defines the amount of time for each slide display.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ASP 99 When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_NOTES 2d Specifies that your notes are also displayed.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_STANDARD 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_URL 6f Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_WEBCAST 52 In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support.
26 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CGI 48 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_ENDLESS 55 Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed.
30 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_FRAMES b2 Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_AUTO 8b The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_KIOSK 87 Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time.
35 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CHG_DEFAULT d4 The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE2 2e Creates standard HTML pages from export pages.
28 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_INDEX 66 Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation.
2e sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE2_CONTENT 27 Creates a title page for your document.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_JPG 83 The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colours.
30 sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_SLD_SOUND 60 Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE3 7a The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colours.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_GIF 76 The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colours.
2e sd%3AComboBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_QUALITY b4 Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality.
2d sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_PNG 7a The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colours.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_3 3a Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_2 3d Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation.
36 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE3_RESOLUTION_1 5f Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides.
2b sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_WWW_EDIT 49 Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication.
29 sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_AUTHOR 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE4 2f Specifies the name of the publication's author.
30 sd%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_MISC 36 Specifies additional text to appear on the title page.
2d sd%3AEdit%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE4_EMAIL_EDIT 1d Specifies the e-mail address.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE5 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE5_TEXTONLY 30 Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DEFAULT 35 Uses the default colours of the viewer's Web Browser.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_LINK 60 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the hyperlink colour of the presentation.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_BACK 61 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the background colour of the presentation.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_DOCCOLORS 44 Determines the colours from the styles used in the current document.
2d sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_TEXT 5b Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the text colour of the presentation.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_VLINK 63 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the visited link colour of the presentation.
2e sd%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_USER 44 Allows you to define your own colours for some presentation objects.
2e sd%3APushButton%3ADLG_PUBLISHING%3APAGE6_ALINK 62 Opens the Colour dialogue box, in which you can select the active link colour of the presentation.
1a SD_HID_SD_HTMLEXPORT_PAGE6 44 Determines the colours from the styles used in the current document.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_LISTWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
21 EXTENSIONS_HID_GROUPWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
20 EXTENSIONS_HID_GRIDWIZARD_FINISH 13 Creates the object.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_DIALOG 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
27 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FImportWizard.Main.Main 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CMDHELP 55 Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename].
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTMSDOCUMENTS 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_OPTSODOCUMENTS 51 Converts old binary documents into the OpenDocument format used by $[officename].
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKCALC 55 Converts documents in the old format of Calc *.sdc into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKMATHGLOBAL 9a Converts documents in the old format of Writer master documents *.sgl into OpenDocument *.odm documents, and Math *.smf into OpenDocument *.odf documents.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKLOGFILE 59 Creates a log file in your working directory showing which documents have been converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKEXCEL 55 Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKWORD 54 Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKWRITER 57 Converts documents in the old format of Writer *.sdw into OpenDocument *.odt documents.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CHKPOWERPOINT 5a Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_0_CHKIMPRESS 8a Converts documents in the old format of Draw *.sda into OpenDocument *.odg documents, and Impress *.sdd into OpenDocument *.odp documents.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENTRECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDDOCUMENTPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
29 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATERECURSE 61 Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBDOCUMENT 31 Indicates that the documents are to be converted.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDDOCUMENTPATHSELECT 30 Opens a dialogue box to select the desired path.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBDOCUMENTPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
2d WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CMDTEMPLATEPATHSELECT 30 Opens a dialogue box to select the desired path.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_CBTEMPLATE 2d Specifies that templates are to be converted.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_EDTEMPLATEPATH 43 Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGIMPORT_2_LBTEMPLATEPATH 34 Specifies the directory containing the source files.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON3 3c All currency cells in the active document will be converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBSOURCE 4b Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_DIALOG 89 Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euro.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBHELP 28 Activates the help for the dialogue box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKRECURSIVE 48 Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBBACK 30 Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_COMBOBOX1 31 Specifies the currency to be converted into euro.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON4 5b All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHECKBOX1 1d Converts the entire document.
14 .uno%3AEuroConverter 89 Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euro.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBGOON 16 Starts the conversion.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBTARGETOPEN 55 Opens a dialogue box in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files.
21 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKPROTECT c2 Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialogue box for entering the password.
27 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CHKTEXTDOCUMENTS 57 Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON1 36 All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_LISTBOX1 32 Displays the ranges to be converted from the list.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_TBTARGET 4b Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBCANCEL 1a Closes the Euro Converter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_CBSOURCEOPEN 41 Opens a dialogue box to select the desired directory or document.
31 macro%3A%2F%2F%2FEuro.AutoPilotRun.StartAutoPilot 89 Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euro.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBDIR 6b Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OPTIONBUTTON2 3f All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGCONVERT_OBFILE 2a Converts a single $[officename] Calc file.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MORK 4f Select this option if you already use an address book in Seamonkey or Netscape.
41 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_THUNDERBIRD 45 Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird.
17 EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_MACAB 4b Select this option if you already use an address book in OS X Address book.
3f extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution.
3a extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_LDAP 46 Select this option if you already have address data on an LDAP server.
21 .uno%3AAutoPilotAddressDataSource 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
49 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_GROUPWISE 43 Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise.
c slot%3A10934 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_FINISH 4a Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialogue box.
1e EXTENSIONS_HID_ABSPILOT_CANCEL 32 Exits the wizard without implementing any changes.
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOKEXPRESS 53 Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook Express.
3d extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OUTLOOK 61 Select this option if you already use an address book in Microsoft Outlook (not Outlook Express).
39 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_KAB 4a Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book.
3b extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_OTHER 60 Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename].
44 extensions%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE%3ARB_EVOLUTION_LDAP 48 Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP.
2c extensions%3ATabPage%3ARID_PAGE_SELECTABTYPE 51 This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename].
4b extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_ADMININVOKATION%3APB_INVOKE_ADMIN_DIALOG 40 Calls a dialogue box in which you can enter additional settings.
3d extensions%3AListBox%3ARID_PAGE_TABLESELECTION%3ALB_TABLELIST 59 Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates.
36 extensions%3AEdit%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3AET_DATASOURCENAME 1f Specifies the data source name.
37 extensions%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3ACB_REGISTER_DS dc Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the data source window (F4). If this check box is unmarked, the database will be available only by opening the database file.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BROWSECONN 31 Specifies the location using a file dialogue box.
34 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FINAL%3APB_BROWSE 31 Specifies the location using a file dialogue box.
49 extensions%3APushButton%3ARID_PAGE_FIELDMAPPING%3APB_INVOKE_FIELDS_DIALOG 3a Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialogue box.
35 service%3Acom.sun.star.wizards.web.CallWizard%3Fstart 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
16 WIZARDS_HID0_WEBWIZARD 46 The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.
18 WIZARDS_HID1_BTN_DEL_SES 1e Deletes the selected settings.
19 WIZARDS_HID1_LST_SESSIONS 7f Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "default".
1b WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOC_EXPORT 44 Select the file format that you want to export the selected file to.
19 WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_DESC 2e Enter a description for the selected document.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_ADD_DOC e6 Opens a dialogue box in which you can select the files that you want to upload to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site.
1b WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_AUTHOR 37 Enter the name of the author for the selected document.
1a WIZARDS_HID2_TXT_DOC_TITLE 88 Enter the title for the selected document. The title appears as a hyperlink to the selected document on the index page of your web site.
18 WIZARDS_HID2_BTN_REM_DOC 28 Removes the selected file from the list.
15 WIZARDS_HID2_LST_DOCS f9 Lists the documents that you want to publish to your web site. The wizard can convert %PRODUCTNAME documents to HTML, PDF, or, in some cases, Flash format before the documents are uploaded. All other files are uploaded in their original file format.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG9 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG8 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG7 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG6 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG3 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG2 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG5 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG4 25 Select the layout for the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID3_IL_LAYOUTS_IMG1 25 Select the layout for the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_UP_DATE 49 Includes the date of the last time a file was modified on the index page.
21 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FILENAME 3b Includes the file names of the documents on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_640 3d Optimises the web site for a 640x480 pixel screen resolution.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_FORMAT 33 Displays the format of the files on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_PAGES 3c Displays the number of pages in your site on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_F_ICON 30 Displays the file format icon on the index page.
24 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_DESCRIPTION 44 Includes the summary information of the documents on the index page.
20 WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_CR_DATE 3f Includes the creation dates of the documents on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_1024 3e Optimises the web site for a 1024x768 pixel screen resolution.
1d WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_SIZE 36 Displays the file size in kilobytes on the index page.
1f WIZARDS_HID4_CHK_DISPLAY_AUTHOR 4d Includes the names of the people who created the documents on the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID4_GRP_OPTIMAIZE_800 3d Optimises the web site for a 800x600 pixel screen resolution.
16 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_ICONS 54 Select the Icons that you want to use for the navigation elements on the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID5_LST_STYLES 2c Select the colour scheme for the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID5_BTN_BACKGND 2d Select a Background image for the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_OTHER 54 Opens a file open dialogue box to select a background image file for the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_BG 36 Specifies a background image for the Web Wizard style.
17 WIZARDS_HID_BG_BTN_NONE 30 Clears the background image from the index page.
17 WIZARDS_HID_IS_BTN_NONE 28 Clears the icon set from the index page.
e WIZARDS_HID_IS 53 Select an icon set for navigation on HTML presentation documents in the Web Wizard.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_EMAIL 57 Enter the e-mail address for the index page. The address is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_CREATED 53 Enter the creation date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1f WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_COPYRIGHT 58 Enter the copyright notice for the index page. The notice is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1e WIZARDS_HID6_DATE_SITE_UPDATED 53 Enter the modified date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag.
1b WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_TITLE 5f Enter the title for the index page. This element is displayed on the title bar of web browsers.
1a WIZARDS_HID6_TXT_SITE_DESC 56 Enter a description for the index page. The description is stored in an HTML meta tag.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
1e WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_LOCAL d9 Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
16 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_LOCAL 28 Opens a dialogue box to select a folder.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_FTP 70 Opens the FTP Connection dialogue box in which you can edit and test the connection settings for the FTP server.
1c WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_PUBLISH_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_SAVE 25 Enter the name for the settings file.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_ZIP 4f Opens a dialogue box in which you can specify the location of the archive file.
15 WIZARDS_HID7_CHK_SAVE 35 Saves the settings that you specified in this wizard.
18 WIZARDS_HID7_BTN_PREVIEW 48 Opens your web page in the default web browser of your operating system.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_FTP c6 Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
14 WIZARDS_HID7_TXT_ZIP 104 Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TXT_PATH 5a Enter the location of a directory on the FTP server in which you want to store your files.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_BTN_PATH 5a Opens a dialogue box in which you can specify the FTP server directory to store the files.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_TEST 33 Tests the FTP connection with the current settings.
14 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_PASS 3d Enter the password that is required to access the FTP server.
f WIZARDS_HID_FTP 44 Edit and test the FTP server connection settings for the Web Wizard.
18 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_USERNAME 3e Enter the user name that is required to access the FTP server.
16 WIZARDS_HID_FTP_SERVER 2f Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ORDER 65 If you click the cell, you can select from the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FIELD 7c Enter the name of the data field that you referred to in the Query. All settings made in the lower rows refer to this field.
1c DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_CRIT 51 Specifies the criteria by which the content of the data field should be filtered.
26 DBACCESS_HID_QUERY_EDIT_JOINCONNECTION 15 Edit Join Properties.
2d dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_SCHEMA 49 Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view.
20 DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_FUNCTION 2b Select a function to run in the query here.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_TABLE 4b The corresponding database table of the selected data field is listed here.
1b DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNCRIT 26 Select conditions to define the query.
1d DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_ALIAS 8d Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in a query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels.
1a DBACCESS_HID_CTL_QRYDGNTAB 50 Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations.
1f DBACCESS_HID_QRYDGN_ROW_VISIBLE 5a If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visible in the query
28 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_SAVE_AS%3AET_TITLE 2a Enter the name of the query or table view.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOINTYPE 2d Specifies the link type of the selected link.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_RIGHT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_LEFT_TABLE 35 Specifies two different tables that you want to join.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_QRY_JOIN_CONTROL f7 Inserts the keyword NATURAL into the SQL statement that defines the relation. The relation joins all columns that have the same column name in both tables. The resulting joined table contains only one column for each pair of equally named columns.
2f dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_OLDPASSWORD 17 Enter the old password.
29 sfx2%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWD%3AED_PASSWD_USER 23 Specifies the name of the new user.
33 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD_REPEAT 1d Enter the new password again.
2c dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_PASSWORD%3AED_PASSWORD 17 Enter the new password.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_DEFAULT 3c Specifies the value that is the default in new data records.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_TABED_PRIMARYKEY 4e If this command has a tick mark, the data field in this line is a primary key.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_TYPECELL 19 Specifies the field type.
21 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_BACKGROUND 32 This area is where you define the table structure.
25 DBACCESS_HID_TABLE_DESIGN_HELP_WINDOW 13 Displays help text.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT_SAMPLE 41 Displays the format code that you can select with the ... button.
1b DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_FORMAT 30 This button opens the Field Format dialogue box.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TABLEDESIGN_INSERTROWS 96 Inserts an empty row above the current row, if the table has not been saved. Inserts an empty row at the end of the table if the table has been saved.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_NAMECELL 84 Specifies the name of the data field. Note the database restrictions, such as the length of the name, special characters and spaces.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TABDESIGN_COMMENTCELL 22 Specifies an optional description.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3APB_CLOSE 18 Closes the dialogue box.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_FIELD 57 Displays a list of the fields in the current table. You can select more than one field.
14 .uno%3ADBIndexDesign 53 The Index Design dialogue box allows you to edit the indexes for the current table.
31 dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN%3ACB_UNIQUE 3e Specifies whether the current index allows only unique values.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_SAVEINDEX 2b Saves the current index in the data source.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_INDEXLIST 8b Displays the available indexes. Select an index from the list to edit. The details of the selected index are displayed in the dialogue box.
1d DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_DROPINDEX 1a Deletes the current index.
28 dbaccess%3AModalDialog%3ADLG_INDEXDESIGN 53 The Index Design dialogue box allows you to edit the indexes for the current table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RENAMEINDEX 1a Renames the current index.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_NEWINDEX 14 Creates a new index.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLGIDX_RESETINDEX 56 Resets the current index to the setting that it had when the dialogue box was started.
2c DBACCESS_HID_DLGINDEX_INDEXDETAILS_SORTORDER 1a Determines the sort order.
1c DBACCESS_HID_CTL_RELATIONTAB 57 Here you can link together tables from the current database through common data fields.
14 .uno%3ADBAddRelation 3c Allows you to define and edit a relation between two tables.
29 DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_LEFTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
2a DBACCESS_HID_RELATIONDIALOG_RIGHTFIELDCELL 4a The names of the tables selected for the link appear here as column names.
1d DBACCESS_HID_RELDLG_KEYFIELDS 28 Defines the key fields for the relation.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_WIZ_TABLENAME_EDIT 1e Specifies a name for the copy.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_APPENDDATA 40 Appends the data of the table to be copied to an existing table.
34 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_VIEW b4 If the database supports Views, you can select this option only when a query is copied in a table container. This option enables you to see and edit a query as a normal table view.
30 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3AET_KEYNAME 46 Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional.
33 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEF 40 Copies only the table definition and not the corresponding data.
3b dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ACB_PRIMARY_COLUMN 4a Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.
37 dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COPYTABLE%3ARB_DEFDATA 29 Creates a 1:1 copy of the database table.
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 3e Lists the fields that you want to include in the copied table.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_LH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
3e dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMNS_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
45 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3ALB_ORG_COLUMN_NAMES bc Lists the available data fields that you can include in the copied table. To copy a data field, click its name, and then click the > button. To copy all of the fields, click the >> button.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_COLUMN_SELECT%3AIB_COLUMN_RH 5a Adds or removes the selected field (> or < button) or all of the fields (<< or >> button).
21 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_BOOL_DEFAULT 2c Select the default value for a Yes/No field.
43 dbaccess%3AMultiListBox%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3ALB_NEW_COLUMN_NAMES 40 Lists the data fields that will be included in the copied table.
35 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3APB_AUTO 23 Enables automatic type recognition.
19 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TYPE 14 Select a field type.
18 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
37 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ATAB_WIZ_TYPE_SELECT%3AET_AUTO 40 Enter the number of lines to use for automatic type recognition.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_TEXT_LEN 32 Enter the number of characters for the data field.
1a DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_SCALE 78 Enter the number of decimal places for the data field. This option is only available for numeric or decimal data fields.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_COLUMNNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_ALL 2b Selects all of the data fields in the list.
3d dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
28 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_AVAIL 165 Lists the data fields in the source table. To include a data field from the source table in the destination table, mark the check box in front of the data field name. To map the content of a data field in the source table to a different data field in the destination table, click the data field in the source table list, and then click the up or down arrow.
37 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3APB_NONE 2a Clears all of the check boxes in the list.
43 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_UP_RIGHT 35 Moves the selected entry up one position in the list.
45 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN_RIGHT 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
3f dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ATAB_WIZ_NAME_MATCHING%3AIB_COLUMN_DOWN 37 Moves the selected entry down one position in the list.
29 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_NAMEMATCHING_COLS_ASSIGN a0 Lists the possible data fields in the destination table. Only the data fields that are selected in the source table list will be included the destination table.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SQL92CHECK 8a Only allows names that use characters that conform to the SQL-92 naming constraints in the data source. All other characters are rejected.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_USECATALOG b7 Uses the current data source of the Catalogue. This is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. If the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver, leave this check box unmarked.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ODBC_OPTIONS 56 Use this text field to enter additional optional driver settings if this is necessary.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_RETRIEVE_AUTO 63 Enter an SQL statement that returns the last auto-incremented value for the primary key data field.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_AUTORETRIEVEENABLED 67 Enables $[officename] support of auto-incremented data fields for the current ODBC or JDBC data source.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_INDICIES 6a Opens the Indexes dialogue box, in which you can organise the table indexes in the current dBASE database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SHOWDELETED 7d Displays all the records in a file, including those marked as deleted. If you mark this check box, you cannot delete records.
33 dbaccess%3AComboBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ACB_TABLES 31 Select the database table that you want to index.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVE 3a Moves the selected table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
39 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_REMOVEALL 38 Moves all of the table indexes to the Free Indexes list.
38 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_TABLEINDEXES 3a Lists the current indexes for the selected database table.
36 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADDALL 38 Moves all of the free indexes to the Table Indexes list.
33 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3AIB_ADD 33 Moves the selected index to the Table Indexes list.
37 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DBASE_INDEXES%3ALB_FREEINDEXES 3b Lists the available indexes that you can assign to a table.
2f dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3ALB_HISTORY 6a Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run.
34 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_STATUS 48 Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran.
31 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3AME_SQL 3a Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run.
32 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_DIRECTSQL%3APB_EXECUTE 40 Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL f2 Some databases track changes to each record by assigning version number to fields that are changed. This number is incremented by 1 each time that the field is changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
d .uno%3ASortup 5b Sorts the list of table names in ascending order starting at the beginning of the alphabet.
1f DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_TBLGRANTS 4c Displays and lets you edit the database access rights for the selected user.
1e DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBCHGPWD 3d Changes the current user password for accessing the database.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSER 34 Adds a new user for accessing the selected database.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_PBUSERDELETE 1a Removes the selected user.
1c DBACCESS_HID_TAB_PAGE_LBUSER 32 Select the user whose settings you want to modify.
34 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_TRANSACTIONLOG 3a Displays the path and the name of the TRANSACTIONLOG file.
2e dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_FREESIZE 53 Displays the amount of free space (in megabytes) that is available in the database.
2a dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SIZE 36 Displays the full size (in megabytes) of the database.
39 dbaccess%3ANumericField%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_MEMORYUSING 42 Displays the amount of used space in the database as a percentage.
31 dbaccess%3AListBox%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3ALB_DATADEVS 38 Displays the path and the name of the DATADEVSPACE file.
31 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_ADABASSTAT%3AET_SYSDEVSPACE 37 Displays the path and the name of the SYSDEVSPACE file.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_USR a1 Enter the name of the domain user that is used by Adabas internally. Normally, the default settings for the name and password of the domain user are not changed.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSPWD 11 Enter a password.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CACHE_SIZE 2e Enter the size of the data cache in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONPWD 11 Enter a password.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE 25 Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE.
2b DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG_SIZE 34 Enter the size of the transaction file in megabytes.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_CONUSR cb Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database. Normally, the default settings for the name and the password of the control user are not changed.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DBNAME 1e Type the name of the database.
29 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DATADEVSPACE_SIZE 4d Enter the size of the database in megabytes here. The maximum size is 100 MB.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBDATADEVSPACE 4b Locate the directory in which you want to save the file, and then click OK.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBTRANSACTIONLOG 4b Locate the directory in which you want to save the file, and then click OK.
21 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_DOMAINPWD 11 Enter a password.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSUSR 2d Enter the name of the database administrator.
25 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_PBSYSDEVSPACE 4b Locate the directory in which you want to save the file, and then click OK.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_SYSDEVSPACE 27 Enter the path for the system DEVSPACE.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_ADABAS_TRANSACTIONLOG 2c Enter the path for the transaction log file.
2a DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHECK_REQUIRED_FIELDS d8 When you enter a new record or update an existing record in a form, and you leave a field empty which is bound to a database column which requires input, then you will see a message complaining about the empty field.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREINDEXAPPENDIX 2d Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements.
1f HID_DSADMIN_PRIMARY_KEY_SUPPORT 5f Enable to overrule Base's heuristics used to detect whether the database supports primary keys.
1b HID_DSADMIN_ESCAPE_DATETIME 35 Use date/time literals that conform to ODBC standard.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_BOOLEANCOMPARISON 3b Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_ENABLEOUTERJOIN 5c Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}
25 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_APPENDTABLEALIAS 39 Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SCHEMA 37 Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DOSLINEENDS 6d Select to use the CR + LF code pair to end every text line (preferred for DOS and Windows operating systems).
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_PARAMETERNAMESUBST 44 Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?).
26 HID_DSADMIN_AS_BEFORE_CORRELATION_NAME 9b Some databases use the keyword "AS" between a name and its alias, while other databases use a whitespace. Enable this option to insert AS before the alias.
27 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SUPPRESS_VERSIONCL 49 Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CATALOG b9 Uses the current data source of the catalogue. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBASE driver.
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_IGNOREDRIVER_PRIV 43 Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver.
1c DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CHARSET 54 Select the character set that you want to use to view the database in $[officename].
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_SPECIAL_MESSAGE 39 Select the type of database to which you want to connect.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLCLASS 49 Enter the name of the JDBC driver class that connects to the data source.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_PB_TESTMYSQLCLASS 3c Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class.
3c dbaccess%3ACheckBox%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3ACB_PASSWORD_REQUIRED 60 If marked, the user will be asked to enter the password that is required to access the database.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_CALC_PATH 4e Enter the path to the spreadsheet document that you want to use as a database.
2e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLDBNAME 1f Enter the name of the database.
1f DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DBASE_PATH 3e Enter the path to the directory that contains the dBASE files.
1e DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FLAT_PATH 4e Enter the path to the folder containing the text files that the database uses.
3b dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_CONNECTION%3APB_TESTCONNECTION 38 Tests the database connection with the current settings.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DLG_DATABASE_WIZARD 57 The Database Wizard creates a database file that contains information about a database.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_GETEXISTINGDATABASE 49 Select to create a database document for an existing database connection.
1b DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DSTYPE 3e Select the database type for the existing database connection.
33 dbaccess%3AListBox%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ALB_DOCUMENTLIST 86 Select a database file to open from the list of recently used files. Click Finish to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
3a dbaccess%3ARadioButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3ARB_OPENEXISTINGDOC 68 Select to open a database file from a list of recently used files or from a file selection dialogue box.
36 dbaccess%3APushButton%3APAGE_GENERAL%3APB_OPENDOCUMENT b5 Opens a file selection dialogue box in which you can select a database file. Click Open or OK in the file selection dialogue box to open the file immediately and to exit the wizard.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_GENERAL_RB_CREATEDBDATABASE 20 Select to create a new database.
36 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_REGISTERDATASOURCE 118 Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is displayed in the View - Data Sources window. You must register a database to be able to insert the database fields in a document (Insert - Fields - Other) or in a mail merge.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_OPENAFTERWARDS 4f Select to display the database file, where you can edit the database structure.
3a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_RB_DONTREGISTERDATASOURCE 4e Select to keep the database information only within the created database file.
34 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_FINAL_CB_STARTTABLEWIZARD 46 Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_PB_MSACCESSLOCATION 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MSACCESS_ET_MSACCESSLOCATION 28 Specifies the path to the database file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_PB_ADABASNAME 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADABAS_ET_ADABASNAME 24 Enter the name of the database file.
3e DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_ET_GENERALUSERNAME 30 A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters.
46 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_AUTHENTIFICATION_CB_GENERALPASSWORDREQUIRED 2b A password must contain 3 to 18 characters.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_ET_ADOURL 1a Enter the data source URL.
28 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ADO_PB_ADOURL 30 Click to open a database selection dialogue box.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_ET_DBASELOCATION 28 Enter the path to the dBASE *.dbf files.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_DBASE_PB_DBASELOCATION 23 Open a path selection dialogue box.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLHOSTSERVER 41 hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database.
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DRIVERCLASS 22 Enter the name of the JDBC driver.
2c DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_MYSQLPORT df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
2a DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_JDBC_ET_JDBCURL df Enter the URL for the database. For example, for the MySQL JDBC driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<name of the database>". For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver.
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
20 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_BASEDN 4c Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com".
29 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_CB_USESSL 56 Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
2d DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_LDAP_ET_HOSTSERVER 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_PORTNUMBER 30 Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389.
22 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_LDAP_HOSTNAME 45 Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com".
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAJDBC 48 Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level.
32 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_MYSQL_RB_CONNECTVIAODBC 48 Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_ET_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 24 Enter the path to the database file.
37 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ODBC_PB_NAMEOFODBCDATASOURCE 39 Click to open an ODBC data source selection dialogue box:
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEPORT 2e Enter the port number for the database server.
35 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLEHOSTSERVER 26 Enter the name of the Oracle database.
30 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_ORACLE_ET_ORACLECLASS 26 Enter the URL for the database server.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_ET_SPREADSHEETPATH 35 Enter the path and file name to the spreadsheet file.
39 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_PB_SPREADSHEETPATH 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
45 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_SPREADSHEET_CB_SPREADSHEETPASSWORDREQUIRED 44 Select to request a password from the user of the database document.
28 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_THOUSANDS_SEPARATOR 90 Enter or select the character that is used as a thousands separator in the text file, for example a comma (1,000), or a dot-on-the-line (1.000).
26 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_DECIMAL_SEPARATOR 8a Enter or select the character that is used as a decimal separator in the text file, for example, a dot-on-the-line (0.5) or a comma (0,5).
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_PB_LOCATIONTEXTFILE 2c Click to open a file selection dialogue box.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSOTHERFILES 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_FIELD_SEPARATOR 4a Enter or select the character that separates data fields in the text file.
2f DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_OWNEXTENSION 42 Click to access custom files. Enter the extension in the text box.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TEXT_SEPARATOR 4c Enter or select the character that identifies a text field in the text file.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSCSVFILES 1a Click to access CSV files.
33 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_ET_LOCATIONTEXTFILE fd Enter the path to the text file or files. If you just want one text file, you can use any extension of the file name. If you enter a folder name, the text files in that folder must have the extension *.csv to be recognised as files of the text database.
31 DBACCESS_HID_PAGE_DBWIZARD_TEXT_RB_ACCESSTXTFILES 1a Click to access txt files.
1f DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_EDIT 50 Opens a window in which you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
f .uno%3ADBRename 71 Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid.
f .uno%3ADBDelete 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
1f .uno%3ADBDatabasePropertiesMenu 11 Opens a sub-menu.
2b .uno%3ADBNewReportAutoPilotWithPreSelection 40 Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
16 .uno%3ADBConvertToView cf Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database.
19 .uno%3ADBDSConnectionType 21 Opens the Connection Type Wizard.
15 .uno%3ADBDSProperties 2b Opens the Database Properties dialogue box.
29 .uno%3ADBNewFormAutoPilotWithPreSelection 3e Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view.
21 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_DELETE 33 Deletes the selected table, query, form, or report.
d .uno%3ADBEdit 50 Opens a window in which you can edit the selected table, query, form, or report.
1b .uno%3ADBDSAdvancedSettings 2b Opens the Advanced Properties dialogue box.
d .uno%3ADBOpen 32 Opens the selected object in the last saved state.
1b .uno%3ADBSendReportToWriter 86 Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
19 .uno%3ADBSendReportAsMail 10e Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and the main text of the e-mail. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export.
42 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_UP 31 Click to go up one level in the folder hierarchy.
49 dbaccess%3AImageButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_NEWFOLDER 36 Click to create a new folder within the database file.
43 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3ABTN_EXPLORERFILE_SAVE 2e Click to save the form into the database file.
40 dbaccess%3AEdit%3ADLG_COLLECTION_VIEW%3AED_EXPLORERFILE_FILENAME 27 Enter the file name for the saved form.
13 .uno%3ADBNewViewSQL 1d Opens a new view in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewTable 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBNewReport 48 Starts the Report Builder window for the selected table, view, or query.
12 .uno%3ADBNewFolder 4f Opens a dialogue box with which you can save a new folder in the database file.
14 .uno%3ADBNewQuerySql 1e Opens a new query in SQL mode.
11 .uno%3ADBNewQuery 21 Opens a new query in design mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewForm 27 Opens a new text document in form mode.
10 .uno%3ADBNewView 20 Opens a new view in design mode.
28 DBACCESS_HID_BROWSER_TABLE_CREATE_DESIGN 1c Opens the table design view.
12 .uno%3ADBUserAdmin 51 Opens the User Administration dialogue box if the database supports this feature.
23 DBACCESS_HID_DSADMIN_TABLE_SELECTOR 6d Opens the Table Filter dialogue box in which you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
17 .uno%3ADBRelationDesign 5d Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations.
12 .uno%3ADBDirectSQL 41 Opens the SQL dialogue box in which you can enter SQL statements.
14 .uno%3ADBTableFilter 6d Opens the Table Filter dialogue box in which you can specify which tables of the database to show or to hide.
14 .uno%3ADBViewQueries 47 Selects the queries container and shows all queries in the detail view.
10 .uno%3ADBPreview 11 Opens a sub-menu.
1c .uno%3ADBDatabaseObjectsMenu 11 Opens a sub-menu.
12 .uno%3ADBViewForms 43 Selects the forms container and shows all forms in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBDisablePreview 2c Disables the preview in the database window.
17 .uno%3ADBShowDocPreview 36 The preview displays the document of a form or report.
16 .uno%3ADBRefreshTables 15 Refreshes the tables.
d .uno%3ADBSort 11 Opens a sub-menu.
1b .uno%3ADBShowDocInfoPreview 49 The preview window displays the document information of a form or report.
14 .uno%3ADBViewReports 47 Selects the reports container and shows all reports in the detail view.
13 .uno%3ADBViewTables 45 Selects the tables container and shows all tables in the detail view.
17 .uno%3ADBMigrateScripts 96 The Database Document Macro Migration Wizard moves existing macros from sub-documents of an old Base file into the new Base file's macro storage area.
32 dbaccess%3AMultiLineEdit%3ATP_SUMMARY%3AED_CHANGES 42 The list shows all changes that were applied to the database file.
45 dbaccess%3APushButton%3ATP_SAVE_DBDOC_AS%3APB_BROWSE_SAVE_AS_LOCATION c1 Choose a location and file name to save the new database file. By default, the new file gets the same name as the old file, while the old file gets renamed with the string "backup" in the name.
36 svtools%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_LOGIN%3ACB_LOGIN_SAVEPASSWORD a1 Select to use the same user name and password without a further dialogue box, when you connect again to the same data source in the current %PRODUCTNAME session.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_PASSWORD 31 Enter the password to connect to the data source.
2e svtools%3AEdit%3ADLG_LOGIN%3AED_LOGIN_USERNAME 32 Enter the user name to connect to the data source.
17 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD 36 The Query Wizard helps you to design a database query.
21 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTTABLES 39 Specifies the table for which the query is to be created.
24 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new query.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND3 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND4 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND3 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND1 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT2 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT1 39 Specifies the field by which the created query is sorted.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDESCEND2 40 Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically descending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND1 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT4 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
1d WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_SORT3 64 Specifies additional fields by which the created query is sorted, if previous sort fields are equal.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND4 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTASCEND2 3f Click to sort in alphabetically or numerically ascending order.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_3 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_2 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHALL 45 Select to filter the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_3 24 Select the condition for the filter.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_2 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_3 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTVALUE_1 29 Enter the value for the filter condition.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTOPERATOR_1 24 Select the condition for the filter.
23 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMATCHANY 47 Select to filter the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_2 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFIELDNAME_1 2f Select the field name for the filter condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEPLUS 1e Appends a new row of controls.
30 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATESUMMARYQUERY 33 Select to show only results of aggregate functions.
29 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_BTNAGGREGATEMINUS 21 Removes the last row of controls.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFIELDS_1 1e Select the numeric field name.
2e WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTAGGREGATEFUNCTION_1 1e Select the aggregate function.
2f WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTAGGREGATEDETAILQUERY 28 Select to show all records of the query.
2a WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERSELFIELDS 3b Displays all fields that are to be used to group the query.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHALL 44 Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_3 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_1 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_3 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_1 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_2 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_3 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
2c WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTERFIELDNAME_2 31 Select the field name for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTFILTERVALUE_2 2b Enter the value for the grouping condition.
28 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTGROUPMATCHANY 46 Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR.
2b WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_LSTFILTEROPERATOR_1 26 Select the condition for the grouping.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTTITLE_1 23 Enter the alias for the field name.
22 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTSUMMARY 20 Displays a summary of the query.
27 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTDISPLAYQUERY 25 Select to save and display the query.
25 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_TXTQUERYTITLE 1c Enter the name of the query.
26 WIZARDS_HID_QUERYWIZARD_OPTMODIFYQUERY 31 Select to save the query and open it for editing.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_TIME 94 Enable Include Time to insert a time field into the active area of the report. The time field displays the current time when the report is executed.
2e REPORTDESIGN_CHECKBOX_RID_DATETIME_DLG_CB_DATE 94 Enable Include Date to insert a date field into the active area of the report. The date field displays the current date when the report is executed.
1a .uno%3AInsertDateTimeField 65 You can open the Date and Time dialogue box of the Report Builder by choosing Insert - Date and Time.
14 .uno%3ASectionShrink 42 Shrinks the selected section to remove top and bottom empty space.
16 .uno%3ASectionAlignTop 62 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the top margin of the area.
19 .uno%3ASectionAlignBottom 65 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the bottom margin of the area.
15 .uno%3ASmallestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest height.
17 .uno%3ASectionAlignLeft 63 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the left margin of the area.
15 .uno%3AGreatestHeight 5c Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest height.
18 .uno%3ASectionAlignRight 64 Select two or more objects and click this icon to align the objects at the right margin of the area.
1a .uno%3ASectionShrinkBottom 3a Shrinks the selected section to remove bottom empty space.
14 .uno%3ASmallestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the smallest width.
11 .uno%3AHFixedLine 2e Inserts a horizontal line to the current area.
17 .uno%3ASectionShrinkTop 37 Shrinks the selected section to remove top empty space.
11 .uno%3AVFixedLine 2c Inserts a vertical line to the current area.
14 .uno%3AGreatestWidth 5b Select two or more objects and click this icon to resize the objects to the greatest width.
16 .uno%3AReportNavigator 7f The Report Navigator reveals the structure of the report. You can use the Report Navigator to insert functions into the report.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DEEPTRAVERSING e8 If Deep traversing is enabled, functions are evaluated considering all lower levels of hierarchy. This would be used for instance for line numbering. If Deep traversing is not enabled, only the first level of hierarchy is evaluated.
12 .uno%3ANewFunction ae In the context menu of the Report Navigator, you will see the same commands as in the Report Builder view, plus additional commands to create new functions or to delete them.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PREEVALUATED 57 If Pre evaluation is enabled, functions are evaluated only when the report is finished.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_INITIALFORMULA 5a Enter the initial value for the evaluation of the formula. Often this is set to 0 or to 1.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_REPORT_NAVIGATOR_TREE 9f Click an entry in the Report Navigator. The corresponding object or area is selected in the Report Builder view. Right-click an entry to open the context menu.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORMULA 44 Enter the formula that defines the function. Use OpenFormula syntax.
3b REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_BOTTOMPAGE 17 Bottom of Page (Footer)
38 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_TOPPAGE 14 Top of Page (Header)
32 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N 6 Page N
32 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_PAGENUMBERS_LST_ALIGNMENT 9 Alignment
37 REPORTDESIGN_RADIOBUTTON_RID_PAGENUMBERS_RB_PAGE_N_OF_M b Page N of M
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_HEIGHT 2a Defines the height of the selected object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEFOOTEROPTION 78 Specifies in which context the page footer will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer
2e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTWHENGROUPCHANGE 17 Print when group change
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELD_SEL c4 The Add Field window is shown automatically when you have selected a table in the Contents box and leave that box. You can also click the Add Field icon on the toolbar, or choose View - Add Field.
34 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_CONDITIONALPRINTEXPRESSION 5b If the Conditional Print Expression evaluates to TRUE, the selected object will be printed.
29 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKTRANSPARENT 51 Specifies whether the background of the selected object is transparent or opaque.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_DATAFIELD 43 On the Data tab page, you can change the data contents to be shown.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_FORCENEWPAGE 66 Force New Page specifies whether the current section and/or the next section is printed on a new page.
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONY 2a Set the Y Position for the selected object
22 EXTENSIONS_HID_PROP_VERTICAL_ALIGN f Vert. Alignment
27 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_POSITIONX 2a Set the X Position for the selected object
13 .uno%3ASelectReport 5a To display the Data or General tab page for the whole report, choose Edit - Select Report.
22 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_FONT 2d Select the font for the selected text object.
2a REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PAGEHEADEROPTION 79 Specifies in which context the page header will be printed: on all pages, or not on pages with a report header or footer.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRESERVEIRI f5 For a picture, you can specify to either insert the picture as a link to a file or only as an embedded object in the Base file. The embedded option increases the size of the Base file, while the link option is not as portable to other computers.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_RPT_WIDTH 26 Sets the width of the selected object.
21 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_VISIBLE 68 An invisible object is not shown in the executed report. It is still visible in the Report Builder view.
23 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_BACKCOLOR 54 Sets the background colour for the selected object, both on screen and for printing.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_KEEPTOGETHER 78 Keep Together specifies to print the current object starting on top of a new page if it doesn't fit on the current page.
2b REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_GROUPKEEPTOGETHER 5c Groups are kept together by page or by column (default). You must enable Keep Together also.
2d REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_PRINTREPEATEDVALUES 23 Specifies to print repeated values.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_PROP_NEWROWORCOL 93 New Row Or Column specifies, for a multi-column design, whether the current section and/or the next section will be printed on a new row or column.
25 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_DELETE 29 Removes the selected field from the list.
41 reportdesign%3AListBox%3ARID_GROUPS_SORTING%3ALST_KEEPTOGETHERLST 4e Select the level of detail by which a group is kept together on the same page.
1e REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSBRW 9f Lists the fields that will be used for sorting or grouping. The field at the top has the highest priority, the second field has the second priority, and so on.
24 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_FIELDEXPRESSION 37 Click to open a list from which you can select a field.
40 REPORTDESIGN_NUMERICFIELD_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_ED_GROUPINTERVALLST 3b Enter the group interval value that records are grouped by.
36 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_GROUPONLST 4b Select to create a new group on each changed value, or on other properties.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_FOOTERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Footer.
1b .uno%3ADbSortingAndGrouping b8 In the Sorting and Grouping dialogue box of Report Builder, you can define the fields that should be sorted in your report, and the fields that should be kept together to form a group.
35 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_HEADERLST 28 Select to show or hide the Group Header.
26 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_UP 28 Moves the selected field up in the list.
28 REPORTDESIGN_HID_RPT_GROUPSORT_MOVE_DOWN 2a Moves the selected field down in the list.
31 REPORTDESIGN_LISTBOX_RID_GROUPS_SORTING_LST_ORDER 19 Select the sorting order.
1b WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_DIALOG 36 The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTBUSINESS 40 Select the business category to see only business sample tables.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDSSELECTED 3b Displays all fields that will be included in the new table.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LBTABLES a2 Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields from that table from the left list box. Repeat this step until you have selected all the fields that you need.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPTPRIVATE 3e Select the private category to see only private sample tables.
23 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_AUTOINCREMENTVALUE 70 Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDMINUS 2c Remove the selected field from the list box.
1d DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_REQUIRED 2c If set to Yes, this field must not be empty.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_COLNAME 54 Displays the name of the selected data field. If you want, you can enter a new name.
22 DBACCESS_HID_TAB_ENT_AUTOINCREMENT 53 If set to Yes, the values for this data field are generated by the database engine.
1c WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDPLUS 25 Add a new data field to the list box.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_SELFIELDNAMES 36 Select a field in order to edit the field information.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CHK_USEPRIMEKEY cd Select to create a primary key. Add a primary key to every database table to uniquely identify each record. For some database systems within %PRODUCTNAME, a primary key is mandatory for editing the tables.
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_FIELDS_PK_AVAILABLE 47 Select a field and click > to add it to the list of primary key fields.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
25 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_AUTOMATIC 41 Select to automatically add a primary key as an additional field.
2a WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CMDREMOVE_PK_SELECTED aa Select a field and click < to remove it from the list of primary key fields. The primary key is created as a concatenation of the fields in this list, from top to bottom.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LB_PK_FIELDNAME 16 Select the field name.
23 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SEVERAL 4f Select to create a primary key from a concatenation of several existing fields.
2e WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_CK_PK_AUTOVALUE_AUTOMATIC b6 Select to automatically insert a value and increment the field's value for each new record. The database must support automatic incrementation in order to use the Auto value feature.
22 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_PK_SINGLE 44 Select to use an existing field with unique values as a primary key.
1d WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_TXT_NAME 19 Specifies the table name.
24 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_MODIFYTABLE 41 Select to save the table design and open the table to enter data.
26 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_WORKWITHTABLE 29 Select to save and edit the table design.
20 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_CATALOG 58 Select the catalogue for the table. (Available only if the database supports catalogues)
28 WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_OPT_STARTFORMWIZARD 83 Select to create a form based on this table. The form is created on a text document with the last used settings of the Form Wizard.
1f WIZARDS_HID_DLGTABLE_LST_SCHEMA 52 Select the schema for the table. (Available only if the database supports schemas)
12 .uno%3ADBTableEdit 39 Opens the selected table so you can change the structure.
12 .uno%3ADBTableOpen 43 Opens the selected table so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportDelete 1c Deletes the selected report.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryDelete 1b Deletes the selected query.
14 .uno%3ADBQueryRename 1b Renames the selected query.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryOpen 43 Opens the selected query so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
11 .uno%3ADBFormOpen 42 Opens the selected form so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
15 .uno%3ADBReportRename 1c Renames the selected report.
12 .uno%3ADBQueryEdit 39 Opens the selected query so you can change the structure.
13 .uno%3ADBReportEdit 37 Opens the selected report so you can change the layout.
13 .uno%3ADBFormRename 1a Renames the selected form.
13 .uno%3ADBReportOpen 44 Opens the selected report so you can enter, edit, or delete records.
11 .uno%3ADBFormEdit 35 Opens the selected form so you can change the layout.
14 .uno%3ADBTableRename 1b Renames the selected table.
14 .uno%3ADBTableDelete 1b Deletes the selected table.
13 .uno%3ADBFormDelete 1a Deletes the selected form.
20 .uno%3AFontworkSameLetterHeights 6b Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all objects.
3c SVX_HID_SVX_CHINESE_TRANSLATION_RB_CONVERSION_TO_TRADITIONAL 46 Click to apply the character spacing to the selected Fontwork objects.
1f .uno%3AFontworkAlignmentFloater 24 Opens the Fontwork Alignment window.
19 .uno%3AFontworkShapeTypes 64 Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects.
26 .uno%3AFontworkCharacterSpacingFloater 2c Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing window.
c FontWork1TBO 3e Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects.
c FontWork2TBO 2b Enter the Fontwork character spacing value.
16 SC_HID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS 8f If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialogue box opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCDLG_SHAREDOCUMENT%3ACB_SHARE dc Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document.
37 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLMINE 30 Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.
14 .uno%3AShareDocument 6f Opens the Share Document dialogue box in which you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.
34 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPMINE 2a Keeps your change, voids the other change.
39 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPALLOTHERS 39 Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes.
35 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCDLG_CONFLICTS%3ABTN_KEEPOTHER 36 Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.
18 .uno%3AFormFilterExecute 65 If you click the Apply Form-Based Filter icon on the Form Filter toolbar, the filter will be applied.
15 .uno%3AFormFilterExit 64 If you click on the Close button on the Form Filter toolbar, the form is displayed without a filter.
1e .uno%3AConfigureToolboxVisible 41 Opens a dialogue box in which you can add, edit and remove icons.
19 SVX_HID_FM_FILTER_IS_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
18 SVX_HID_FILTER_NAVIGATOR 194 The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator. You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions.
f SVX_HID_FM_EDIT de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
16 SVX_HID_FM_IS_NOT_NULL de You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null").
1a .uno%3AFormFilterNavigator 69 To connect several filter conditions with Boolean OR, click the Filter navigation icon on the filter bar.
1e SVX_HID_CTL_FONTWORK_FAVORITES bc Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or Ctrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text.
12 .uno%3ASaveGraphic a4 To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You will see the Graphics Export dialogue box. Enter a file name and select a file type.
20 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADBButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AMathButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
15 FWK_HID_BACKINGWINDOW 44 Click an icon to open a new document or to open a file dialogue box.
24 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AWriterButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ADrawButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AOpenButton 3b The Open a Document icon presents a file open dialogue box.
25 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3AImpressButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
22 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ACalcButton 42 The document icons each open a new document of the specified type.
26 .HelpId%3AStartCenter%3ATemplateButton 42 The Templates icon opens the Templates and Documents dialogue box.
12 .uno%3AShowLicense 3a Displays the Licencing and Legal information dialogue box.
f .uno%3AHelpMenu 4c The Help menu allows you to start and control the $[officename] Help system.
c .uno%3AAbout 4b Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights.
12 .uno%3AShowCredits d3 Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into LibreOffice) or LibreOffice since 2010-09-28.
10 .uno%3AHelpIndex 4a Opens the main page of the $[officename] Help for the current application.
e RID_ENVTOOLBOX 41 The Standard bar is available in every $[officename] application.
13 .uno%3AExtendedHelp 48 Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer until the next click.
18 .HelpId%3Atableobjectbar 75 The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table.
14 .uno%3ADSBFormLetter 34 Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters.
17 .uno%3ADSBInsertColumns 59 Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position.
10 .uno%3ANewRecord 15 Creates a new record.
13 .uno%3ADeleteRecord 40 Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting.
e .uno%3ARecUndo 20 Allows you to undo a data entry.
e .uno%3ARecSave 41 Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database.
11 .uno%3ANextRecord 1d Takes you to the next record.
11 .uno%3ALastRecord 1d Takes you to the last record.
12 .uno%3AFirstRecord 1e Takes you to the first record.
11 .uno%3APrevRecord 21 Takes you to the previous record.
15 .uno%3AAbsoluteRecord 59 Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record.
e .uno%3AGridUse 3d Specifies that you can move objects only between grid points.
16 .uno%3ABezierSymmetric 4d This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point.
12 HID_BEZIER_TOOLBOX 53 The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points.
13 .uno%3ABezierDelete a8 Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points. If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key.
14 .uno%3ABezierConvert 4f Converts a curve into a straight line or converts a straight line into a curve.
12 .uno%3ABezierClose 19 Closes a line or a curve.
13 .uno%3ABezierSmooth 41 Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point.
13 .uno%3ABezierInsert 41 Activates the insert mode. This mode allows you to insert points.
11 .uno%3ABezierMove 2e Activates a mode in which you can move points.
14 .uno%3ABezierCutLine 79 The Split Curve icon splits a curve. Select the point or points at which you want to split the curve, then click the icon
1c .uno%3ABezierEliminatePoints 3c Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion.
11 .uno%3ABezierEdge 39 Converts the selected point or points into corner points.
18 .uno%3AOptionsTreeDialog 49 This command opens a dialogue box for a customised program configuration.
1a CUI_HID_OFADLG_TREELISTBOX 18 Select an entry to edit.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_SHORTCUT 13 Type your initials.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TITLE 1e Type your title in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FIRSTNAME 13 Type your forename.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_NAME 12 Type your surname.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_SHORTNAME 13 Type your initials.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COUNTRY 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELCOMPANY 24 Type your work number in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COMP 2c Type the name of your company in this field.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
17 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_GENERAL 2d Use this tab page to enter or edit user data.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_MAIL 18 Type your email address.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_PLZ 21 Type your postcode in this field.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FIRSTNAME 13 Type your forename.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_COMPANY 2c Type the name of your company in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_TITLE 1e Type your title in this field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_FAX 23 Type your fax number in this field.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_MAIL 18 Type your email address.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_STATE 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_NAME 12 Type your surname.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_POSITION 30 Type your position in the company in this field.
28 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_COUNTRY 2b Type the name of the county where you live.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_POSITION 30 Type your position in the company in this field.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_BUSINESS_DATA%3AED_ZIP 21 Type your postcode in this field.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_ZIPCODE 21 Type your postcode in this field.
2f cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_TELPRIVAT 31 Type your private telephone number in this field.
24 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_ZIP 21 Type your postcode in this field.
2c cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_US_CITY 2e Type the name of the post town where you live.
27 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_PRIVATE_DATA%3AED_STREET 2b Type the name of your street in this field.
2b cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXPAGE_GENERAL%3AED_EMAIL 18 Type your email address.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_AUTOSAVE 9b Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the time interval between saves.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_INET 40 Mark this check box for relative saving of URLs in the Internet.
35 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_RELATIVE_FSYS 43 Mark this check box for relative saving of URLs in the file system.
29 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_APP 51 Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format.
34 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_SETTINGS 47 Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_SAVE 72 In the General section, you can select default settings for saving documents, and can select default file formats.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_ODF_VERSION fd Some companies or organisations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1 format. You can select that format to save in the list box. This older format cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.2 (Extended) is recommended where possible.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ACB_LOAD_DOCPRINTER 173 If marked, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialogue box. If unmarked, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this check box is marked.
38 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ARID_DLG_ALIEN_WARNING%3ACB_WARNING_OFF c4 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialogue box.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_BACKUP d5 Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_WARNALIENFORMAT c4 You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialogue box.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_NOPRETTYPRINTING 61 When saving the document, %PRODUCTNAME writes the XML data without indents and extra line breaks.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ALB_FILTER b7 Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialogue box.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3ABTN_DOCINFO 66 Specifies that the Properties dialogue box will appear every time that you select the Save As command.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SFXPAGE_SAVE%3AED_AUTOSAVE 49 Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option.
18 CUI_HID_OPTPATH_CTL_PATH 5f To modify an entry in this list, select it and click Edit. You can also double-click the entry.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_PATH 3c Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialogue box.
14 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PATH 75 This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user.
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_PATH%3ABTN_STANDARD 48 The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries.
3b cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ABTN_ADD_MULTIPATH 6c Opens the Select Path dialogue box to select another folder or the Open dialogue box to select another file.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_MULTIPATH%3ALB_MULTIPATH 5f Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files.
1b CUI_HID_LNGDLG_NUM_PREBREAK 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
2a cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_WORD 86 You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 38 Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_MODULES_EDIT 34 To edit a language module, select it and click Edit.
18 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_NEW 90 Opens the New Dictionary dialogue box, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3AED_DICTNAME 30 Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_EDIT_DIC 77 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialogue box, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_NEW_DIC 90 Opens the New Dictionary dialogue box, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_OPTIONS_EDIT 44 If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit.
1d CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_DICS 2e Lists the available user-defined dictionaries.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ALB_DICTLANG 4f By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_NEW_REPLACE a0 Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_DICT_EDIT 77 Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialogue box, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_OPTIONS 34 Defines the options for spell check and hyphenation.
12 .uno%3ASpellOnline 41 Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3APB_DELETE_REPLACE 3b Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXDLG_LNG_ED_NUM_PREBREAK%3AED_PREBREAK 50 Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_LINGU 49 Specifies the properties of the spell checker, thesaurus and hyphenation.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_LINGU%3APB_LINGU_DICS_DEL_DIC 59 Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected.
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3ALB_ALLDICTS 20 Specifies the book to be edited.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SFXDLG_NEWDICT%3ABTN_EXCEPT 44 Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents.
19 CUI_HID_CLB_LINGU_MODULES 28 Contains the installed language modules.
2d cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SFXDLG_EDITDICT%3AED_REPLACE a6 This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_UP 4b Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_DOWN 4b Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level.
20 CUI_HID_CLB_EDIT_MODULES_MODULES 71 Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module.
42 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3ALB_EDIT_MODULES_LANGUAGE 25 Specifies the language of the module.
46 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_EDIT_MODULES%3APB_EDIT_MODULES_PRIO_BACK 37 Click here to undo the current changes in the list box.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_2 5 Green
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_1 3 Red
31 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLORMODEL 5d To modify, select the colour model: Red-Green-Blue (RGB) or Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-Black (CMYK).
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_SAVE 6a Opens the Save As dialogue box, which enables you to save the current colour table under a specified name.
2e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_ADD 12 Adds a new colour.
29 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AEDT_NAME 6b Specifies the name of a selected colour. You can also type a name in this field when defining a new colour.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLOR 62 Allows you to select a colour from a colour table, edit an existing colour, or define new colours.
30 cui%3AImageButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_LOAD 4b Accesses the Open dialogue box, which allows you to select a colour palette
31 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_MODIFY 1b Changes the current colour.
2c cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ALB_COLOR 53 Contains a list of available colours. To select a colour, choose one from the list.
15 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_RGB_3 4 Blue
32 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3ABTN_WORK_ON 4b Accesses the Open dialogue box, which allows you to select a colour palette
32 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_LUMINANCE 2c Sets the Brightness in the HSB colour model.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_HUE 25 Sets the Hue in the HSB colour model.
31 cui%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLOR%3AMTR_FLD_4 44 Sets the Black colour value or key (black) in the CMYK colour model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_2 37 Sets the Magenta colour value in the CMYK colour model.
2b svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_KEY 44 Sets the Black colour value or key (black) in the CMYK colour model.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_2 b7 Sets the small selection cursor in the right window on the colour, which corresponds to the selected colour in the left window and updates the respective values in the numeric fields.
2c svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_CYAN 34 Sets the Cyan colour value in the CMYK colour model.
28 svtools%3APushButton%3ADLG_COLOR%3ABTN_1 bb Click the <-- button to replace the selected colour in the colour palette with the colour selected at the right. The button is enabled when you select a colour in one of the four corners.
2d svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_BLUE 33 Sets the Blue colour value in the RGB colour model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_3 36 Sets the Yellow colour value in the CMYK colour model.
2e svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_YELLOW 36 Sets the Yellow colour value in the CMYK colour model.
2e svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_GREEN 34 Sets the Green colour value in the RGB colour model.
2c svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_RED 32 Sets the Red colour value in the RGB colour model.
2f svtools%3AMetricField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_MAGENTA 37 Sets the Magenta colour value in the CMYK colour model.
33 svtools%3ANumericField%3ADLG_COLOR%3ANUM_SATURATION 2c Sets the Saturation in the HSB colour model.
16 CUI_HID_TPCOLOR_CMYK_1 34 Sets the Cyan colour value in the CMYK colour model.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_TOOLTIP 86 Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters.
33 cui%3APushButton%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3APB_HELPAGENT_RESET 67 Click Reset Help Agent to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_EXTHELP 72 Displays some short help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control in a dialogue box.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_HELPAGENT b0 Specifies that the Help Agent will be displayed automatically in selected situations. Click the Help Agent window to see a Help page with information about the current context.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_DOCSTATUS 48 Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification.
29 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ACB_FILEDLG 92 Specifies whether $[officename] dialogue boxes are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogue boxes of the operating system are used.
2f cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ANF_YEARVALUE 4a Defines a date range, within which the system recognises a two-digit year.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_MISC%3ALB_HELPFORMAT 27 Choose the style of $[officename] Help.
39 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTHEIGHT 41 Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_USETABLE 36 Enables the font replacement settings that you define.
18 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_DELETE 26 Deletes the selected font replacement.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT2 31 Enter or select the name of the replacement font.
35 cui%3AComboBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_FONT1 3e Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace.
1d CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBSTITUTION ca Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution only replaces a font when it is displayed on screen or during printing. It does not change the font specified in your document formatting.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ACB_NONPROP 51 Mark this check box to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVX_FONT_SUBSTITUTION%3ALB_FONTNAME 3e Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code.
1a CUI_HID_OFA_FONT_SUBST_CLB 111 Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace both the screen font and the printer font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing.
17 CUI_HID_OFA_SUBST_APPLY 26 Applies the selected font replacement.
27 SVX_CHECKBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_CB_SYSTEM_FONT 73 Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogue boxes. Othwerise another installed font is used.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_ANTIALIASE af When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts.
2d cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SYSTEM_FONT 73 Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogue boxes. Othwerise another installed font is used.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONTANTIALIASING 2f Select to smooth the screen appearance of text.
13 CUI_HID_OFA_TP_VIEW 17 Specifies view options.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEPOS 59 Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogue boxes.
19 .uno%3ARestoreEditingView 87 Specifies whether to restore the last used document view. Many view properties valid when the document was last saved will be restored.
12 .uno%3ARefreshView 4a Press Shift+Ctrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document.
2e svx%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_SELECTION 7a Select the transparency level for transparent selections. The default value is 75%. You can select values from 10% to 90%.
29 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2a cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_ICONSTYLE 3f Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogue boxes.
2e cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_HISTORY 82 Lists the last five fonts that you used in the current document at the top of the list in the Font Name box on the Formatting bar.
23 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSIZE 2c Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.
2b svx%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_SELECTION b2 If enabled, the text selection in Writer and the cell selection in Calc will be shown using a transparent colour. If not enabled, the selection will be shown by inverted colours.
24 SVX_LISTBOX_OFA_TP_VIEW_LB_ICONSTYLE 3f Select the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogue boxes.
2b cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MENU_ICONS a4 Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes.
2c cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ALB_MOUSEMIDDLE 30 Defines the function of the middle mouse button.
2b cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_FONT_SHOW 7b Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar.
2f cui%3AMetricField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3AMF_WINDOWSIZE 69 Uses percentile scaling for font size in user interface elements, such as dialogue boxes and icon labels.
30 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ACB_USE_HARDACCELL 63 Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_VIEW%3ANF_AA_POINTLIMIT 34 Enter the smallest font size to apply anti-aliasing.
44 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_NORMAL 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
3f sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY a5 If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons.
36 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERSIZE 58 Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_AUTO 76 Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page.
3f sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTFILEOUTPUT 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
3a sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS 6e Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
44 sfx2%3AListBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ALB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
39 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_TRANSPARENCY 69 Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_COLOR 4a Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate colour.
45 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_OPTIMAL 75 High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STRIPES 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
47 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEBITMAPS_TRANSPARENCY 75 If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects.
48 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCEBITMAPS_RESOLUTION 61 Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased.
3c sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_REDUCEGRADIENTS 44 If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality.
3d sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_PRINTEROUTPUT 57 Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file.
4a sfx2%3ANumericField%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ANF_REDUCEGRADIENTS_STEPCOUNT 3e Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing.
3d sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_PAPERORIENTATION 5e Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document.
47 sfx2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ARB_REDUCETRANSPARENCY_NONE 2f With this option transparency is never printed.
40 sfx2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_COMMONPRINTOPTIONS%3ACB_CONVERTTOGREYSCALES 39 Specifies that all colours are printed only as greyscale.
30 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_OLECACHE 46 Choose the maximum number of OLE objects that are pooled in the cache.
2f cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ACB_QUICKLAUNCH 89 Mark this check box if you want $[officename] to enable Quickstart. This option is available if the Quickstart module has been installed.
3a cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICOBJECTCACHE 64 Specifies that objects which are larger than the selected megabytes will not be placed in the cache.
36 cui%3ATimeField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ATF_GRAPHICOBJECTTIME 4f Specifies the time that each graphic remains in the cache in hours and minutes.
2c cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3AED_UNDO 5c You can specify the number of steps which can be undone by selecting a number from the list.
34 cui%3ANumericField%3AOFA_TP_MEMORY%3ANF_GRAPHICCACHE 30 Specifies the total cache size for all graphics.
27 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_NAME_SCHEME 23 Enter a name for the colour scheme.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_SAVESCHEME 48 Saves the current settings as a colour scheme that you can reload later.
38 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3ALB_COLORSCHEME 2a Selects the colour scheme you want to use.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_COLORCONFIG%3APB_DELETESCHEME 58 Deletes the colour scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme.
29 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_COLORCONFIG_COLORLIST_WIN 33 Select the colours for the user interface elements.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTO_DETECT_HC 5d Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high-contrast mode when the system background colour is very dark.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TIPHELP 3f Hides the Help tips after the number of seconds that you enter.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_GRAPHICS 40 Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME.
41 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ANF_TIPHELP 35 Enter the number of seconds to display the Help tips.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_TEXTSELECTION 27 Displays cursor in read-only documents.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_PAGE_PREVIEWS 4c Applies the high-contrast settings of the operating system to page previews.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ACCESSIBILITY_TOOL e1 Allows you to use assistive tools, such as external screen readers, Braille devices or speech recognition input devices. The Java Runtime Environment must be installed on your computer before you can enable assistive support.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_AUTOMATIC_FONT_COLOR 6d Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system colour settings. This option only affects the screen display.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ACCESSIBILITYCONFIG%3ACB_ANIMATED_TEXTS 48 Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PROXY 2a Type the name of the proxy server for FTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PROXY 2b Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_SOCKS_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_FTP_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_NOPROXYFOR 62 Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons.
15 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_PROXY 27 Specifies the type of proxy definition.
33 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
32 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTP_PORT 31 Type the port for the corresponding proxy server.
34 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3AED_HTTPS_PROXY 53 Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_PROXY%3ALB_PROXYMODE 27 Specifies the type of proxy definition.
31 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MAIL%3AED_MAILERURL 27 Enter the e-mail program path and name.
37 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MAIL%3APB_MAILERURL 37 Opens a file dialogue box to select the e-mail program.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_MOZPLUGIN%3ACB_MOZPLUGIN_CODE c7 Enables the Browser Plug-in to show %PRODUCTNAME documents in a browser window. Select, click OK, then restart your browser. Then, in the browser window, click a hyperlink to a %PRODUCTNAME document.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SIGNDOCS de Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_CHANGE 5a Opens a dialogue box in which you can view and change the password for the selected entry.
3f cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVEALL 22 Removes all entries from the list.
42 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_REPEAT 20 Enter the master password again.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CTRLHYPERLINK 88 If enabled, you must hold down the Ctrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink.
37 uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD 26 Enter the master password to continue.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3ACB_SEC_SAVEPASSWORDS bb If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_RECOMMENDPWD a3 Mark this check box to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogue boxes. Unmark the check box to save files by default without password.
41 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_CONNECTIONS 76 Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialogue box.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_CREATEPDF a6 Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments.
45 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_SECURITYOPTIONS 36 Opens the "Security options and warning" dialogue box.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_PRINTDOCS 7e Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments.
3e cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MACROSEC 26 Opens the Macro Security dialogue box.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_WEBCONNECTION_INFO%3APB_REMOVE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
3f uui%3AEdit%3ADLG_UUI_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT%3AED_MASTERPASSWORD_CRT 1a Enter the master password.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_INET_SECURITY%3APB_SEC_MASTERPASSWORD 2d Opens the Enter Master Password dialogue box.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_REMOVEINFO e6 Mark this check box to always remove user data from the file properties. If this check box is not marked, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset button on File - Properties - General.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_SECURITY_OPTIONS%3ACB_SAVESENDDOCS 90 Mark this check box to see a warning dialogue box when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments.
3b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC_WARNING 6f If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE2 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
36 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_UNKNOWN_TAGS 67 Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognised by $[officename] to be imported as fields.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE3 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
30 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_CHARSET 33 Select the appropriate character set for the export
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE1 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE4 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_NUMBERS_ENGLISH_US dd If not marked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialogue box. If marked, numbers will be interpreted using the 'English (USA)' locale.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_IGNORE_FONTNAMES 97 Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used.
39 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_PRINT_EXTENSION 55 If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document is exported as well.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE5 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE7 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_LOCAL_GRF e3 Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialogue box to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ACB_STARBASIC 62 Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format.
2f cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ALB_EXPORT 32 Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents.
33 cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_HTMLOPT%3ANF_SIZE6 7b Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags.
14 .uno%3ASwEditOptions a4 These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_GRF 40 Specifies whether to display graphics and objects on the screen.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VSCROLL 20 Displays the vertical scrollbar.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HRULER 5f Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_VMETRIC 5d Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER 5d Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_ANY_RULER 59 Enables the rulers. Use the following two check boxes to select the ruler(s) to be shown.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_HSCROLL 22 Displays the horizontal scrollbar.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_TBL 2f Displays the tables contained in your document.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_FIELD 4f Displays the field names in the document instead of the contents of the fields.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_METRIC 26 Specifies the Unit for HTML documents.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_CROSS aa Displays snap lnes around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_POSTIT db Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comment's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_SMOOTH_SCROLL 2d Activates the smooth page scrolling function.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_VRULER_RIGHT 30 Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ACB_DRWFAST 3e Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_CONTENT_OPT%3ALB_HMETRIC 5f Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list.
16 .uno%3ATableBoundaries 8c To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document.
24 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_IDX 52 Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents.
25 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST 43 Specifies the fonts for lists and numbering and all derived styles.
2f sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ACB_DOCONLY 3f Specifies that the settings apply to the current document only.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
f SW_HID_STD_FONT 3d Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.
2c sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_INDEX_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
29 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_STANDARD 3e Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_TITLE 2b Specifies the font to be used for headings.
2b sw%3AMetricBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LIST_SIZE 1f Specifies the size of the font.
26 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_STD_FONT%3ALB_LABEL 3e Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_CTRLFLD 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintEmptyPages%3ACheckBox 190 If this check box is marked, automatically-inserted blank pages will be printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
34 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PAPERFROMSETUP a9 For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer.
2d sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_REVERSE 72 Specifies whether to reverse the printing order. The last page of the document will then be the first one printed.
2c sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PROSPECT_RTL 67 Mark this check box to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_SINGLEJOBS 62 Specifies that each new print job will begin on a new page even if you are using a duplex printer.
3b .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintAnnotationMode%3AListBox 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
36 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintControls%3ACheckBox 4b Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed.
28 SW%3ALISTBOX%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ALB_FAX 84 If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BLACK_FONT 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
40 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPicturesAndObjects%3ACheckBox 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2b SW%3ARADIOBUTTON%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ARB_NO 38 Specifies whether comments in your document are printed.
38 .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintBlackFonts%3ACheckBox 30 Specifies whether to always print text in black.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_RIGHTP 4a Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_BACKGROUND 96 Specifies whether to include colours and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2b sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_LEFTP 4a Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document.
2b sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_HIDDEN_TEXT 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
14 SW_HID_OPTPRINT_PAGE 38 Specifies print settings within a text or HTML document.
30 sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_TEXT_PLACEHOLDER 7a Enable this option to print text placeholders. Unmark this check box to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
38 .HelpID%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintHiddenText%3ACheckBox 3a Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PGRF 41 Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTPRINT_PAGE%3ACB_PROSPECT 45 Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format.
3c .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintPageBackground%3ACheckBox 96 Specifies whether to include colours and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.
2f sw_CheckBox_TP_OPTPRINT_PAGE_CB_PRINTEMPTYPAGES 190 If this check box is marked, automatically-inserted blank pages will be printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not.
3d .HelpId%3Avcl%3APrintDialog%3APrintTextPlaceholder%3ACheckBox 7a Enable this option to print text placeholders. Unmark this check box to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.
14 SW_HID_OPTTABLE_PAGE 33 Defines the attributes of tables in text documents.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_REPEAT_HEADER 59 Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIX 56 Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFMT_FORMATTING 9a If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text.
2c sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_VAR 40 Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size.
32 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMALIGNMENT 43 Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_HEADER 60 Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style.
2c sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_BORDER 34 Specifies that table cells have a border by default.
1d .uno%3ATableNumberRecognition 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognised and formatted as numbers.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_DONT_SPLIT 43 Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ACB_NUMFORMATTING 4f Specifies that numbers in a text table are recognised and formatted as numbers.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWMOVE 30 Specifies the value to be used for moving a row.
30 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3ARB_FIXPROP 4d Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLINSERT 32 Specifies the default value for inserting columns.
32 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_ROWINSERT 2f Specifies the default value for inserting rows.
30 sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTTABLE_PAGE%3AMF_COLMOVE 33 Specifies the value to be used for moving a column.
28 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_PARA 79 Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information.
35 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLTAB 7f When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLINDENT 9d When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned.
2f sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_CHAR_HIDDEN 66 Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Non-printing Characters is enabled.
37 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLSPACE 9f When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN_PARA 6e If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ARB_SHDWCRSFILLMARGIN 101 Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centred or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set.
31 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_ALLOW_IN_PROT 57 Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes.
12 SW_HID_OPTSHDWCRSR 6f In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_HSPACE c6 Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as grey boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHYPH 178 Specifies whether user-defined delimiters are displayed. These are hidden delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with user-defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user-defined delimiter has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_BREAK 82 Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph.
2e sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_FLD_HIDDEN 47 Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields.
29 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SPACE 42 Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot.
30 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_SHDWCRSONOFF 1c Activates the direct cursor.
27 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTSHDWCRSR%3ACB_TAB 37 Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_MARKPOS 3e Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_COL eb You can also choose a colour to identify each type of recorded change. If "By author" is chosen from the list, the colour is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
29 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_LC_COL 44 Specifies the colour for highlighting the changed lines in the text.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_DEL_ATTR ca Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_ATTR 4a Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_INS_COL eb You can also choose a colour to identify each type of recorded change. If "By author" is chosen from the list, the colour is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
12 SW_HID_REDLINE_OPT 32 Defines the appearance of changes in the document.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_ATTR 88 Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_REDLINE_OPT%3ALB_CHG_COL eb You can also choose a colour to identify each type of recorded change. If "By author" is chosen from the list, the colour is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified according to the corresponding author of the changes.
2e sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
13 SW_HID_OPTLOAD_PAGE 2e Specifies general settings for text documents.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_FIELDS d2 The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this check box unmarked, some fields are updated each time that a special condition takes place.
37 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ACB_AUTO_UPDATE_CHARTS be Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.
2d sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2f sw%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
2a sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3ALB_METRIC 35 Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents.
2f sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_NEVER 31 Links are never updated while loading a document.
2b sw%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTLOAD_PAGE%3AMF_TAB 37 Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_REQUEST 37 Updates links only on request while loading a document.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ARB_ALWAYS 2e Always updates links while loading a document.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_USE_PRINTER_METRICS 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
37 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE%3APB_DEFAULT 69 Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME.
1c SW_HID_OPTCOMPATIBILITY_PAGE 8c Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents.
30 sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_CHARSTYLE 1e Specifies the character style.
2e sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_FORMAT 29 Specifies the type of numbering required.
29 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AEDT_TEXT 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
2c sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ALB_LEVEL 4f Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start.
2d sw%3AEdit%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3AED_SEPARATOR 57 Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level.
15 SW_HID_OPTCAPTION_CLB 4a Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid.
2b sw%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_POS 42 Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object.
33 sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ACB_APPLYBORDER 41 Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame.
31 sw%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTCAPTION_PAGE%3ABOX_CATEGORY 2e Specifies the category of the selected object.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_X 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the x-axis.
15 .uno%3AHelplinesFront 2c Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.
14 SVX_HID_OPTIONS_GRID cc Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid.
10 .uno%3AGridFront 2e Sets the visible grid in front of all objects.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_GRID_VISIBLE 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_Y 51 Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the y-axis.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SYNCHRONIZE 44 Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically.
3a svx%3ANumericField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ANUM_FLD_DIVISION_Y 4c Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the y-axis.
34 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_USE_GRIDSNAP 5a Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points.
35 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_DRAW_X 4e Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the x-axis.
12 .uno%3AGridVisible 26 Specifies whether to display the grid.
13 .uno%3AToolsOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
14 .uno%3AScEditOptions f4 Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_OUTLINE 84 If you have defined an outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_PAGEBREAKS 46 Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_RFIND c1 Specifies that each reference is highlighted in colour in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a coloured border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing.
2d sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_OBJGRF 34 Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_NIL 36 Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0.
12 .uno%3ANoteVisible 5f To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu.
34 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ROWCOLHEADER 34 Specifies whether to display row and column headers.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_FORMULA 43 Specifies whether to show formulae instead of results in the cells.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_GRID dc Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background colour, or to hide them.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANCHOR 67 Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_ANNOT d3 Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialogue box.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_CLIP f5 If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighbouring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighbouring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.
2c sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_COLOR 3e Specifies a colour for the grid lines in the current document.
15 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CONTENT 86 Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_TBLREG 56 Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_HSCROLL 59 Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window.
30 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_SYNCZOOM 72 If marked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not marked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DRAW 40 Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VALUE 11b Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell content in different colours, depending on type, regardless of how their display is formatted. Text cells are highlighted in black, cells with numbers in blue, and cells containing formulae, logical values, dates, and so on, in green.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_VSCROLL 56 Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ALB_DIAGRAM 37 Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden.
31 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CONTENT%3ACB_GUIDELINE 5a Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects.
2d sc%3AMetricField%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3AMF_TAB 1f Defines the tab stops distance.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_MARKHDR 56 Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EDITMODE 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2e sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_TEXTFMT 6a Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen.
2f sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_REPLWARN 71 Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning will appear.
13 .uno%3ASetInputMode 4e Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key.
2b sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_ALIGN 64 Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_FORMAT 74 Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells.
2a sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ALB_UNIT 2c Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_LAYOUT%3ACB_EXPREF f9 Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_NEW 37 Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box.
36 sc%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_ENTRIES 50 Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS a2 All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialogue box. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.
31 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_COPY 119 Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialogue box appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialogue box to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column.
2e sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3AED_COPYFROM 99 Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default.
30 sc%3APushButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ABTN_ADD 23 Adds a new list into the Lists box.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_USERLISTS%3ALB_LISTS 4a Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing.
25 sc%3AModalDialog%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW 2f Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_COLS 56 Select the Columns option to summarise the contents of the selected columns in a list.
36 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCDLG_COLORROW%3ABTN_GROUP_ROWS 50 Select the Rows option to summarise the contents of the selected rows in a list.
2d sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_ITERATE b1 Specifies whether formulae with iterative references (formulae that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CALC 11b Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_MATCH 11e Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box is marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions.
2d sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_PREC af Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the Standard number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers.
2c sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_LOOKUP cc Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators.
2b sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_REGEX 68 Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons.
30 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESTD 1c Sets 1899-12-30 as day zero.
2a sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_CASE 6b Specifies whether to distinguish between upper- and lower-case in text strings when comparing cell content.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATESC10 64 Sets 1900-01-01 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries.
12 SC_HID_SCPAGE_CALC 32 Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets.
31 sc%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_DATE1904 65 Sets 1904-01-01 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format.
32 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3ABTN_GENERAL_PREC dd You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows.
2e sc%3ANumericField%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_STEPS 2b Sets the maximum number of iteration steps.
24 sc%3AEdit%3ARID_SCPAGE_CALC%3AED_EPS ad Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop.
17 SC_HID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE 62 The Changes dialogue box specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_REMOVE 45 Specifies the colour with which to highlight deletions in a document.
2e sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_MOVE 40 Specifies the colour with which to highlight moved cell content.
31 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_CONTENT 31 Specifies the colour for changes to cell content.
30 sc%3AListBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_OPREDLINE%3ACLB_INSERT 46 Specifies the colour with which to highlight insertions in a document.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SKIPEMPTYPAGES 55 Specifies that empty pages that have no cell content or draw objects are not printed.
35 sc%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SCPAGE_PRINT%3ABTN_SELECTEDSHEETS ef Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialogue box or in the Format - Print Ranges dialogue box. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed.
14 .uno%3ASdEditOptions ad Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_RULER 54 Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_MOVE_OUTLINE 59 %PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_VIEW 26 Specifies the available display modes.
38 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HANDLES_BEZIER ec Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible.
14 .uno%3AHelplinesMove 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
33 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_CONTENTS%3ACBX_HELPLINES 3a Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object.
1a SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_CONTENTS 26 Specifies the available display modes.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_BORDER 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
30 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_BIGORTHO 171 Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges check box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter.
34 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_ANGLE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
13 .uno%3AHelplinesUse 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
11 .uno%3ASnapBorder 58 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_SNAP_AREA cc Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control.
2e svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ROTATE 7c Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control.
33 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_POINTS 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
38 svx%3AMetricField%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3AMTR_FLD_BEZ_ANGLE 26 Defines the angle for point reduction.
32 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_FRAME 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_SNAP_HELPLINES 57 Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap line when you release the mouse.
10 .uno%3ASnapFrame 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object.
11 .uno%3ASnapPoints 69 Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object.
2d svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_GRID%3ACBX_ORTHO 79 Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_SNAP 3a Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects.
2f sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_COLOR 35 Specifies that you want to print in original colours.
2c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_FRONT 2e Select Front to print the front of a brochure.
33 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_GRAYSCALE 36 Specifies that you want to print colours as greyscale.
33 SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_HIDDEN_PAGES 55 Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation.
2f SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAGENAME 29 Specifies whether to print the page name.
17 SD_HID_SD_PRINT_OPTIONS 43 Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGETILE a8 Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_DEFAULT 44 Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing.
31 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BOOKLET 44 Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_DATE 2c Specifies whether to print the current date.
32 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_PAGESIZE 89 Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
2b SD%3ACHECKBOX%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_TIME 2c Specifies whether to print the current time.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_PAPERBIN 52 Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup.
34 sd%3ARadioButton%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ARBT_BLACKWHITE 41 Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white.
2b sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_PRINT_OPTIONS%3ACBX_BACK 2c Select Back to print the back of a brochure.
34 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_MERGE_PARA_DIST 68 Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint.
2f sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_QUICKEDIT 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_CROOK_NO_CONTORTION 71 Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2-D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object.
36 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MASTERPAGE_CACHE 4d Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page.
34 sd%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3AMTR_FLD_TABSTOP 26 Defines the spacing between tab stops.
39 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_TEMPLATE 64 Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation.
31 sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_PICKTHROUGH 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
10 .uno%3AQuickEdit 6e If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text.
12 .uno%3APickThrough 3e Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text.
3c sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_START_WITH_ACTUAL_PAGE 4e Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide.
3d sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_MARKED_HIT_MOVES_ALWAYS a6 Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object.
2a sd%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACBX_COPY 69 If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the Ctrl key (Mac: Command key).
2a sd%3AComboBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ACB_SCALE 2b Determines the drawing scale on the rulers.
2a sd%3AListBox%3ATP_OPTIONS_MISC%3ALB_METRIC 35 Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations.
16 SD_HID_SD_OPTIONS_MISC 42 Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents.
17 .uno%3ASdGraphicOptions ae Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default.
14 .uno%3ASmEditOptions 97 Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math.
3d starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_IGNORE_SPACING 56 Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line.
16 SFX2_HID_PRINT_OPTIONS 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
36 starmath%3AMetricField%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3AMF_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
31 STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_TITLEROW 53 Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout.
28 starmath%3ATabPage%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE 3e Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents.
d tobeannounced 4a Saves only those symbols which each formula that are used in that formula.
36 starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ZOOM 56 Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor.
3f starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_ORIGINAL_SIZE 3b Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size.
3c starmath%3ACheckBox%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ACB_EQUATION_TEXT 5f Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout.
2e STARMATH_CHECKBOX_RID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE_CB_FRAME 3a Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.
3d starmath%3ARadioButton%3ARID_PRINTOPTIONPAGE%3ARB_FIT_TO_PAGE 3c Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout.
41 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3ALB_CHART_COLOR_LIST 37 Displays all the colours available for the data series.
44 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_OPTPAGE_CHART_DEFCOLORS%3APB_RESET_TO_DEFAULT 4e Restores the colour settings that were defined when the program was installed.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_WBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_PBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
3a svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_EXECTBL bf The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this check box is not marked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run.
36 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_STG 120 Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form.
37 svx%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_MSFILTEROPT%3ACB_EBAS_CODE d8 Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub.
1b CUI_HID_OFAPAGE_MSFLTR2_CLB ad The List Box field displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] (L) and/or when saving into a Microsoft format (S).
2f cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_WEST_LANG 4e Specifies the language used for the spell check function in western alphabets.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_DECIMALSEPARATOR 7a Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad.
30 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_ASIAN_LANG 4c Specifies the language used for the spell check function in Asian alphabets.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_LOCALESETTING 7b Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure.
33 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_ASIANSUPPORT 70 Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_COMPLEX_LANG 3f Specifies the language for the complex text layout spell check.
33 cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_USERINTERFACE ca Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogue boxes, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME.
32 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CURRENT_DOC 5a Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document.
31 cui%3ACheckBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ACB_CTLSUPPORT 7c Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME.
2e cui%3AListBox%3AOFA_TP_LANGUAGES%3ALB_CURRENCY 5c Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields.
36 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ALB_LANGUAGE 4e Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters.
39 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_NO_COMP 30 Specifies that no compression at all will occur.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_PUNCT 4d Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation.
37 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ACB_STANDARD 75 When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language:
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_KANA_COMP 3c Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed.
30 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_START 51 Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_PUNCT_COMP 32 Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed.
3e cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3ARB_CHAR_KERNING 37 Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text.
2e cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ASIAN_LAYOUT%3AED_END 4b Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_WHITESPACES 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
43 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_MIDDLE_DOT 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
3d cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_IAIYA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_FULL_HALF_WIDTH 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
47 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_TSITHICHI_DHIZI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_DIZI_DUZU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
45 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HYUFYU_BYUVYU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
4a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_VARIANT_FORM_KANJI 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_IGNORE_PUNCTUATION 27 Specifies the characters to be ignored.
4b cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_PROLONGED_SOUNDMARK 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
46 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_OLD_KANA_FORMS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_HIRAGANA_KATAKANA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_KIKU 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
41 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_BAVA_HAFA 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
44 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CONTRACTIONS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
42 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_SESHE_ZEJE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
49 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_REPEAT_CHAR_MARKS 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
48 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_MINUS_DASH_CHOON 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_JSEARCH_OPTIONS%3ACB_MATCH_CASE 39 Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search.
3e cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ACB_SEQUENCECHECKING 3b Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai.
40 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_VISUAL 9d Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction.
41 cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ARB_MOVEMENT_LOGICAL b4 Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor towards the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor towards the beginning of the current text.
35 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_CTL%3ALB_NUMERALS ac Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.
3f cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_DRIVERPOOLING 74 Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver check box in order to pool its connection.
3c cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ACB_POOL_CONNS 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
24 DBACCESS_HID_DSBROWSER_DISCONNECTING 34 Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled.
3d cui%3ANumericField%3ARID_OFAPAGE_CONNPOOLOPTIONS%3ANF_TIMEOUT 45 Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_EDIT 40 Opens the Database Link dialogue box to edit the selected entry.
36 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_DELETE 29 Removes the selected entry from the list.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SFXPAGE_DBREGISTER%3ABTN_NEW 3b Opens the Database Link dialogue box to create a new entry.
17 CUI_HID_DBPATH_CTL_PATH 67 Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit.
33 cui%3APushButton%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3APB_BROWSEFILE 44 Opens a file dialogue box in which you can select the database file.
27 cui%3AEdit%3ADLG_DOCUMENTLINK%3AET_NAME 52 Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_PARAMETER 2d Opens the Java Start Parameters dialogue box.
34 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_ADD 38 Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer.
3a cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3APB_CLASSPATH 22 Opens the Class Path dialogue box.
19 CUI_HID_OPTIONS_JAVA_LIST b7 Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting.
3a cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_OPTIONS_JAVA%3ACB_JAVA_ENABLE 34 Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDPATH 35 Select a folder and add the folder to the class path.
33 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3ALB_PATH 3f Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries.
3d cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_REMOVE_PATH 64 Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path.
3c cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_CLASSPATH%3APB_ADDARCHIVE 4f Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_REMOVE 29 Deletes the selected JRE start parameter.
38 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3APB_ASSIGN 31 Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list.
35 cui%3AEdit%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3AED_PARAMETER 8e Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters.
37 cui%3AListBox%3ARID_SVXDLG_JAVA_PARAMETER%3ALB_ASSIGNED 72 Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove.
3a xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_LOW c5 A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors.
3d xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_MEDIUM e6 Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation.
3f xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_VERYHIGH 7c Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
3b xmlsecurity%3ARadioButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_SECLEVEL%3ARB_HIGH bf Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_REMOVE_TRUSTCERT 47 Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates.
48 xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3APB_VIEW_TRUSTCERT 45 Opens the View Certificate dialogue box for the selected certificate.
4d xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_REMOVE_TRUSTFILELOC 44 Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations.
43 xmlsecurity%3AListBox%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3ALB_TRUSTFILELOC c4 Trusted file locations are used only if the security level is set to "very high". With this setting, document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations.
4a xmlsecurity%3APushButton%3ARID_XMLSECTP_TRUSTSOURCES%3AFL_ADD_TRUSTFILELOC 64 Opens a folder selection dialogue box. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute.
28 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_TRUSTSOURCES 1f Lists the trusted certificates.
2b sw%3ANumericField%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ANF_PORT 14 Enter the SMTP port.
33 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_AUTHENTICATION 7b Opens the Server Authentication dialogue box in which you can specify the server authentication settings for secure e-mail.
2a sw%3ACheckBox%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3ACB_REPLYTO 64 Uses the e-mail address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to e-mail address.
23 SW_CHECKBOX_TP_MAILCONFIG_CB_SECURE 39 When available, uses a secure connection to send e-mails.
29 sw%3APushButton%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3APB_TEST 4a Opens the Test Account Settings dialogue box to test the current settings.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_ADDRESS 26 Enter your e-mail address for replies.
2a sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_DISPLAYNAME 10 Enter your name.
25 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_SERVER 1b Enter the SMTP server name.
26 sw%3AEdit%3ATP_MAILCONFIG%3AED_REPLYTO 2c Enter the address to use for e-mail replies.
3c cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYMONTH 27 A check will be performed once a month.
38 cui%3ACheckBox%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ACB_AUTOCHECK 82 Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates.
39 cui%3APushButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3APB_CHECKNOW 1e A check will be performed now.
3a cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYDAY 25 A check will be performed once a day.
3b cui%3ARadioButton%3ARID_SVXPAGE_ONLINEUPDATE%3ARB_EVERYWEEK 43 A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting.
33 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_SERVER 38 Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server.
46 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SEP_AUTHENTICATION 3d Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_IMAP 32 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP.
39 sw%3ANumericField%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ANF_PORT 2a Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server.
3f sw%3ACheckBox%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ACB_AUTHENTICATION 43 Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP.
35 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_USERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the SMTP server.
38 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_OUTPASSWORD 25 Enter the password for the user name.
38 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_POP3 33 Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INUSERNAME 28 Enter the user name for the IMAP server.
37 sw%3AEdit%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3AED_INPASSWORD 13 Enter the password.
40 sw%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_MM_SERVERAUTHENTICATION%3ARB_SMPTAFTERPOP 50 Select if you are required to first read your e-mail before you can send e-mail.
3a sw%3AMultiLineEdit%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3AED_ERROR 68 In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings.
21 SW_HID_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS_TLB 41 In the top list box you will see the results of the test session.
36 sw%3APushButton%3ADLG_MM_TESTACCOUNTSETTINGS%3APB_STOP 36 Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually.
2a XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_VIEWSIGNATURES 77 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays the location and the status of the certificate.
22 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_CERTPATH 77 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays the location and the status of the certificate.
43 xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_CERTPATH%3AML_CERTSTATUS 77 The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays the location and the status of the certificate.
3f xmlsecurity%3AMultiLineEdit%3ARID_XMLSECTP_DETAILS%3AML_ELEMENT 45 Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_DETAILS 6a The Details page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays detailed information about the certificate.
24 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_CTRL_ELEMENTS 6a The Details page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays detailed information about the certificate.
21 XMLSECURITY_HID_XMLSEC_TP_GENERAL 67 The General page of the View Certificate dialogue box displays basic information about the certificate.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_ROW 28 Inserts a new row below the current row.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_COL 3c Switches the current column with its neighbour to the right.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_TEXT_COL 56 Inserts a new text column after the current column for hierarchical axes descriptions.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_COL 5e Deletes the current series or text column. It is not possible to delete the first text column.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_SERIES_LABEL 20 Enter names for the data series.
12 .uno%3ADiagramData 4d Opens the Chart Data Table dialogue box in which you can edit the chart data.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_SWAP_ROW 32 Switches the current row with its neighbour below.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_DELETE_ROW 44 Deletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the label row.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TBI_DATA_INSERT_COL 33 Inserts a new data series after the current column.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisTitle 4e Click Axes Title On/Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the axis labels.
12 .uno%3AToggleTitle 50 Click Title On/Off on the Formatting bar to show or hide the title and subtitle.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuTitles 3e Opens a dialogue box to enter or modify the titles in a chart.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2e Positions the legend at the left of the chart.
17 .uno%3AInsertMenuLegend 8f Opens the Legend dialogue box, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 2d Positions the legend at the top of the chart.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_LEGEND_POS%3ALB_LEGEND_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
13 .uno%3AToggleLegend 44 To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 30 Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 2f Positions the legend at the right of the chart.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PLACEMENT 3d Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_PERCENT 3a Displays the percentage of the data points in each column.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_KNOB 42 Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_NUMBER 30 Displays the absolute values of the data points.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_VALUE 30 Displays the absolute values of the data points.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_ROTATION_EDIT 3e Enter the counterclockwise rotation angle for the data labels.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SYMBOL 38 Displays the legend icons next to each data point label.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_NUMBERFORMAT 31 Opens a dialogue box to select the number format.
1c CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_PB_PERCENT_NUMBERFORMAT 35 Opens a dialogue box to select the percentage format.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuDataLabels 4d Opens the Data Labels dialogue box, which enables you to set the data labels.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_TEXT 21 Shows the data point text labels.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_DATALABEL_SEPARATOR 48 Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XAXIS 30 Displays the x-axis as a line with subdivisions.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YAXIS 30 Displays the y-axis as a line with subdivisions.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZAXIS 30 Displays the z-axis as a line with subdivisions.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XAXIS 29 Displays a secondary x-axis in the chart.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YAXIS 29 Displays a secondary y-axis in the chart.
15 .uno%3AInsertMenuAxes 30 Specifies the axes to be displayed in the chart.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SIGMA 52 Standard Deviation: Displays the standard deviation (square root of the variance).
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CT_INDICATE 1e Specifies the error indicator.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_VALUE 51 Enter the value to subtract from the displayed value as the negative error value.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_VARIANT 60 Variance: Displays the variance calculated from the number of data points and respective values.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_NEGATIVE 1f Shows only negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_CONSTERROR 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_BOTH 27 Shows positive and negative error bars.
23 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PLUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SHOW_POSITIVE 1f Shows only positive error bars.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE 7f Enter the address range from where to obtain the negative error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_RANGE 6d Click Cell Range and then specify a cell range from which to take the positive and negative error bar values.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER ab Click a button to shrink the dialogue box, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialogue box to full size.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_RANGE 7f Enter the address range from where to obtain the positive error values. Use the Shrink button to select the range from a sheet.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_POSITIVE_VALUE 4a Enter the value to add to the displayed value as the positive error value.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR_VALUE 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NO_ERROR 1d Does not show any error bars.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_PERCENT_VALUE 75 Displays a percentage. The display refers to the corresponding data point. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_SAME_FOR_BOTH bf Enable to use the positive error values also as negative error values. You can only change the value of the "Positive (+)" box. That value gets copied to the "Negative (-)" box automatically.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_FUNCTION_LB 2e Select a function to calculate the error bars.
2f CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_NEGATIVE_RANGE_CHOOSER ab Click a button to shrink the dialogue box, then use the mouse to select the cell range in the spreadsheet. Click the button again to restore the dialogue box to full size.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_BIGERROR 97 Error Margin: Displays the highest error margin in percent according to the highest value of the data group. Set the percentage in the Parameters area.
24 CHART2_HID_SCH_STATISTIK_MINUS_VALUE 41 Displays constant values that you specify in the Parameters area.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuYErrorBars 47 Use the y-Error Bars dialogue box to display error bars for 2-D charts.
1e .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquation 91 To show the trend line equation, select the trend line in the chart, right-click to open the context menu, and choose Insert Trend Line Equation.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LOGARITHMIC 22 A logarithmic trend line is shown.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_NONE 17 No trend line is shown.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_LINEAR 1d A linear trend line is shown.
26 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_EQUATION 35 Shows the trend line equation next to the trend line.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuTrendlines 50 Trend lines can be added to all 2-D chart types except for Pie and Stock charts.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_SHOW_R_SQUARED 3e Shows the coefficient of determination next to the trend line.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_POWER 1c A power trend line is shown.
27 CHART2_HID_SCH_TRENDLINE_RB_EXPONENTIAL 23 An exponential trend line is shown.
1b .uno%3AInsertMenuMeanValues 8c Mean Value Lines are special trend lines that show the mean value. Use Insert - Mean Value Lines to insert mean value lines for data series.
31 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_DONT_PAINT 67 For a missing value, no data will be shown. This is the default for chart types Column, Bar, Line, Net.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_2 89 Changes the scaling of the y-axis. This axis is only visible when at least one data series is assigned to it and the axis view is active.
2a chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_GAP 33 Defines the spacing between the columns in percent.
2e chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_OPTIONS%3AMT_OVERLAP 3b Defines the necessary settings for overlapping data series.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_STARTING_ANGLE_DIAL 154 Drag the small dot along the circle or click any position on the circle to set the starting angle of a pie or doughnut chart. The starting angle is the mathematical angle position where the first piece is drawn. The value of 90 degrees draws the first piece at the 12 o'clock position. A value of 0 degrees starts at the 3 o'clock position.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_BARS_SIDE_BY_SIDE 58 The bars from different data series are shown as if they were attached only to one axis.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_CONTINUE_LINE 7a For a missing value, the interpolation from the neighbouring values will be shown. This is the default for chart type X-Y.
32 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ACB_CLOCKWISE af The default direction in which the pieces of a pie chart are ordered is counter-clockwise. Mark the Clockwise direction check box to draw the pieces in the opposite direction.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_CONNECTOR 8b For "stacked" and "percent" column (vertical bar) charts, mark this check box to connect the column layers that belong together with lines.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARB_ASSUME_ZERO 60 For a missing value, the y-value will be shown as zero. This is the default for chart type Area.
32 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ARBT_OPT_AXIS_1 54 This option is active as default. All data series are aligned to the primary y-axis.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_OPTIONS%3ACB_INCLUDE_HIDDEN_CELLS 5f Mark this check box to also show values of currently hidden cells within the source cell range.
3b chart2%3ANumericField%3ATP_POLAROPTIONS%3ANF_STARTING_ANGLE 74 Enter the starting angle in the range 0 to 359 degrees. You can also click the arrows to change the displayed value.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_ZGRID 40 Adds grid lines that subdivide the z-axis into smaller sections.
1b .uno%3AToggleGridHorizontal c4 The Horizontal Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the x-axis. Note: This only works if the Minor grid check boxes in Insert - Grids are unmarked.
19 .uno%3AToggleGridVertical c0 The Vertical Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the y-axis. Note: This only works if the x-Axis Minor grid is not selected in Insert - Grids.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_YGRID 40 Adds grid lines that subdivide the y-axis into smaller sections.
16 .uno%3AInsertMenuGrids ae You can divide the axes into sections by assigning grid lines to them. This allows you to get a better overview of the chart, especially if you are working with large charts.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_SECONDARY_XGRID 40 Adds grid lines that subdivide the x-axis into smaller sections.
16 .uno%3AFormatSelection 1c Formats the selected object.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryYTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
d .uno%3AZTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
d .uno%3AXTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
16 .uno%3ASecondaryXTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
f .uno%3ASubTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
10 .uno%3AMainTitle 2e Modifies the properties of the selected title.
d .uno%3AYTitle 57 Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together.
10 .uno%3AAllTitles 57 Modifies the properties of the selected title or the properties of all titles together.
25 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_EQUATION 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
22 CHART2_HID_SCH_TEXTDIRECTION_TITLE 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTOVERLAP 39 Specifies that the text in cells may overlap other cells.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_TEXTBREAK 14 Allows a text break.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_DOWNUP 41 Stagger numbers on the axes, odd numbers lower than even numbers.
3e chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_AUTOORDER 2b Automatically arranges numbers on the axis.
32 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ALB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_STACKED 33 Assigns vertical text orientation for cell content.
16 .uno%3AToggleAxisDescr 5d The AxesTitle On/Off icon on the Formatting bar switches the labelling of all axes on or off.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_UPDOWN 42 Staggers numbers on the axis, even numbers lower than odd numbers.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_DEGREES 33 Allows you to manually enter the orientation angle.
2c CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_LABEL_LB_AXIS_TEXTDIR 99 Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled.
3d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ACB_AXIS_LABEL_SCHOW_DESCR 32 Specifies whether to show or hide the axis labels.
21 CHART2_HID_SCH_ALIGNMENT_CTR_DIAL 45 Clicking anywhere on the wheel defines the variable text orientation.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_AXIS_LABEL%3ARB_AXIS_LABEL_SIDEBYSIDE 2a Arranges numbers on the axis side by side.
d .uno%3ALegend 3f Defines the border, area and character attributes for a legend.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisB 98 Opens a dialogue box in which you can edit the properties of the secondary y-axis. To insert a secondary y-axis, choose Insert - Axes and select y-Axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisA 98 Opens a dialogue box in which you can edit the properties of the secondary x-axis. To insert a secondary x-axis, choose Insert - Axes and select x-Axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisZ 50 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
15 .uno%3ADiagramAxisAll 50 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisX 50 Opens a dialogue box, in which you can edit the properties of the selected axis.
13 .uno%3ADiagramAxisY 41 Opens the y-Axis dialogue box to change properties of the y-axis.
38 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE_MayBeDateAxis 80 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unmarked state is the mathematical direction.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3AValueAxis 80 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unmarked state is the mathematical direction.
24 CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_SCALE_EDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
2d chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_STEP_MAIN 37 Defines the interval for the main division of the axes.
35 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_REVERSE%3ACategory 80 Defines where the lower and where the higher values are displayed at the axis. The unmarked state is the mathematical direction.
37 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_TIME_RESOLUTION 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2d chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_STEPHELP 35 Defines the interval for the subdivision of the axes.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_HELP_TIME_UNIT 4d Minor interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MIN 38 Defines the minimum value for the beginning of the axis.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_HELP 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2a chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_ORIGIN 41 Specifies at which position to display the values along the axis.
27 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_SCALE%3AEDT_MAX 32 Defines the maximum value for the end of the axis.
2f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_MAIN_TIME_UNIT 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
31 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_STEP_MAIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
30 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_TIME_RESOLUTION 47 Resolution can be set to show days, months, or years as interval steps.
2b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_MAX 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2c chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_LOGARITHM 42 Specifies that you want the axis to be subdivided logarithmically.
28 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_SCALE_CBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
2e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ACBX_AUTO_ORIGIN 49 You must first unmark the Automatic option in order to modify the values.
33 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_SCALE%3AMT_MAIN_DATE_STEP 4d Major interval can be set to show a certain number of days, months, or years.
2a chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_SCALE%3ALB_AXIS_TYPE 6e For some types of axes, you can select to format an axis as text or date, or to detect the type automatically.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_INNER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_INNER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
35 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_TICKS_OUTER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
39 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_TICKS_OUTER 3e Specifies that marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
42 chart2%3ASpinField%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
36 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
2f CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_TICKS 4b Select where to place the marks: at labels, at axis, or at axis and labels.
30 CHART2_LISTBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_LB_PLACE_LABELS 63 Select where to place the labels: near axis, near axis (other side), outside start, or outside end.
3c CHART2_SPINFIELD_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 40 Enter the value where the axis line should cross the other axis.
44 CHART2_COMBOBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_EDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
4a chart2%3AComboBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3AEDT_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT_CATEGORY 44 Select the category where the axis line should cross the other axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_INNER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the inner side of the axis.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ACB_MINOR_OUTER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
30 CHART2_CHECKBOX_TP_AXIS_POSITIONS_CB_MINOR_OUTER 4d Specifies that minor interval marks are placed on the outer side of the axis.
3f chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_AXIS_POSITIONS%3ALB_CROSSES_OTHER_AXIS_AT 5f Select where to cross the other axis: at start, at end, at a specified value, or at a category.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYHelp 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
15 .uno%3ADiagramGridAll 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZHelp 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridYMain 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXHelp 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridXMain 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
17 .uno%3ADiagramGridZMain 39 Opens the Grid dialogue box for defining grid properties.
12 .uno%3ADiagramWall ab Opens the Chart Wall dialogue box, in which you can modify the properties of the chart wall. The chart wall is the "vertical" background behind the data area of the chart.
13 .uno%3ADiagramFloor bf Opens the Chart Floor dialogue box, in which you can modify the properties of the chart floor. The chart floor is the lower area in 3-D charts. This function is only available for 3-D charts.
12 .uno%3ADiagramArea 9f Opens the Chart Area dialogue box, in which you can modify the properties of the chart area. The chart area is the background behind all elements of the chart.
3b chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_B 17 Apply a B-spline model.
3e chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_ORDER 22 Set the degree of the polynomials.
43 chart2%3AMetricField%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3AMF_SPLINE_RESOLUTION 13 Set the resolution.
3f chart2%3ARadioButton%3ADLG_SPLINE_PROPERTIES%3ARB_SPLINES_CUBIC 1b Apply a cubic spline model.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_4 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Y_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the y-axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_2 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_8 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3a chart2%3ACheckbox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_ROUNDEDEDGE 18 Edges are rounded by 5%.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_X_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the x-axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
42 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_AMBIENT_COLOR 2e Select a colour using the colour dialogue box.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_3 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_1 45 Click to enable or disable the specular light source with highlights.
3a chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_OBJECTLINES 42 Shows borders around the areas by setting the line style to Solid.
40 chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
3c chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_AMBIENTLIGHT 26 Select a colour for the ambient light.
36 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ACB_SHADING 3f Applies Gouraud shading if marked, or flat shading if unmarked.
d .uno%3AView3D a7 Opens a dialogue box to edit the properties of a three dimensional view for Column, Bar, Pie, and Area charts. For Line and X-Y (Scatter) charts you can see 3-D lines.
3f chart2%3AMetricField%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3AMTR_FLD_Z_ROTATION 57 Sets the rotation of the chart on the z-axis. The preview responds to the new settings.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_5 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_6 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
3c chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHT_7 34 Click to enable or disable the uniform light source.
39 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_PERSPECTIVE bc Mark the Perspective box to view the chart as through a camera lens. Use the spin button to set the percentage. With a high percentage nearer objects look bigger than more distant objects.
34 chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEAPPEARANCE%3ALB_SCHEME 48 Select a scheme from the list box, or mark any of the check boxes below.
3f chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEGEOMETRY%3ACBX_RIGHT_ANGLED_AXES 106 If Right-angled axes is enabled, you can rotate the chart contents only in x- and y-direction, that is, parallel to the chart borders. Right-angled axes is enabled by default for newly created 3-D charts. Pie and Doughnut charts do not support right-angled axes.
46 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ABTN_LIGHTSOURCE_COLOR 2e Select a colour using the colour dialogue box.
3b chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_3D_SCENEILLUMINATION%3ALB_LIGHTSOURCE 2e Select a colour for the selected light source.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_SHOW 20 Displays a legend in your chart.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_TOP 2d Positions the legend to the top of the chart.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_Y 71 Enter a label for the secondary y-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_ZGRID 75 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Z 59 Enter a label for the z-axis. This option is only available for three-dimensional charts.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_LEFT 2e Positions the legend to the left of the chart.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_YGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the y-axis.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CB_XGRID 39 Displays grid lines that are perpendicular to the x-axis.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_BOTTOM 30 Positions the legend to the bottom of the chart.
20 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SECONDARY_X 71 Enter a label for the secondary x-axis. This option is only available for charts that support a secondary x-axis.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_Y 28 Enter a label for the y-axis (vertical).
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_LEGEND_POS_RIGHT 2f Positions the legend to the right of the chart.
16 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_X 2a Enter a label for the x-axis (horizontal).
19 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_MAIN 1d Enter a title for your chart.
18 CHART2_HID_SCH_TITLE_SUB 20 Enter a subtitle for your chart.
12 .uno%3ADiagramType 22 Opens the Chart Type dialogue box.
1d CHART2_HID_SCH_WIZARD_ROADMAP 25 Click to go to the named wizard page.
2e chart2%3AListBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ALB_3D_SCHEME 1c Select the type of 3-D look.
38 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y_PERCENT 27 Stack series display values as percent.
34 chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_XVALUE_SORTING 6b Connects points by ascending x-values, even if the order of values is different, in an X-Y scatter diagram.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_SPLINES 1e The lines are shown as curves.
1b CHART2_HID_SCH_NUM_OF_LINES 3b Set the number of lines for the Column and Line chart type.
17 CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_TYPE 1a Select a basic chart type.
1e CHART2_HID_SCH_LB_BAR_GEOMETRY 1d Select a shape from the list.
30 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ARB_STACK_Y 31 Stack series display values on top of each other.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_STACKED 28 Displays stacked series for Line charts.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_CTL_VARIANT 2a Select a sub-type of the basic chart type.
2d chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3ACB_3D_LOOK 27 Enables a 3-D look for the data values.
35 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_CHARTTYPE%3APB_SPLINE_DIALOG 31 Opens a dialogue box to set the curve properties.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATACOLS df Data series obtain their data from consecutive columns in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data column will contain x-values for all series. All other data columns are used as y-values, one for each series.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AED_RANGE a7 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
34 chart2%3ARadioButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ARB_DATAROWS db Data series obtain their data from consecutive rows in the selected range. For scatter charts, the first data series will contain x-values for all series. All other data series are used as y-values, one for each series.
3b chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_ROW_ASLABELS 10b For data series in columns: The first row in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first row in the range is used as categories. The remaining rows comprise the data series. If this check box is not marked, all rows are data series.
3e chart2%3ACheckBox%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3ACB_FIRST_COLUMN_ASLABELS 119 For data series in columns: The first column in the range is used as names for data series. For data series in rows: The first column in the range is used as categories. The remaining columns comprise the data columns. If this check box is not marked, all columns are data columns.
31 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_RANGECHOOSER%3AIB_RANGE a7 Enter the data range that you want to include in your chart. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
11 .uno%3ADataRanges 54 Opens the Data Ranges dialogue box in which you can edit Data Range and Data Series.
35 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_CAT 157 Shows the source range address of the categories (the text strings that you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an X-Y chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2f chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_CATEGORIES 157 Shows the source range address of the categories (the text strings that you can see on the x-axis of a category chart). For an X-Y chart, the text box contains the source range of the data labels which are displayed for the data points. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2a chart2%3AEdit%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AEDT_RANGE 105 Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2e chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_ADD 88 Adds a new entry below the current entry in the Data Series list. If an entry is selected, the new data series gets the same chart type.
2f chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_DOWN 36 Moves down the selected entry in the Data Series list.
1f CHART2_HID_SCH_DATA_RANGES_LIST a1 Shows all the data ranges used by the data series that is selected in the Data Series list box. Each data range shows the role name and the source range address.
31 chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_REMOVE 35 Removes the selected entry from the Data Series list.
36 chart2%3AImageButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3AIMB_RANGE_MAIN 105 Shows the source range address from the second column of the Data Range list box. You can change the range in the text box or by dragging in the document. To minimise this dialogue box while you select the data range in Calc, click the Select data range button.
2d chart2%3APushButton%3ATP_DATA_SOURCE%3ABTN_UP 34 Moves up the selected entry in the Data Series list.
1a CHART2_HID_SCH_SERIES_LIST a8 Shows a list of all data series in the chart. Click an entry to view and edit that data series. Click Add to insert a new series into the list after the selected entry.
11 .uno%3ADataInRows 2a Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
14 .uno%3ADataInColumns 2a Changes the arrangement of the chart data.
10 .uno%3AScaleText 45 Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size of the chart.
15 .uno%3ANewArrangement b6 Moves all chart elements to their default positions inside the current chart. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of elements.
12 .uno%3AContextType 2c Displays the name of the current chart type.
19 .uno%3AResetAllDataPoints 29 Resets all data points to default format.
11 .uno%3ADeleteAxis 1a Deletes the selected axis.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataSeries 18 Formats the data series.
17 .uno%3AFormatYErrorBars 19 Formats the y-error bars.
11 .uno%3AFormatAxis 1a Formats the selected axis.
12 .uno%3AFormatTitle 1b Formats the selected title.
16 .uno%3AInsertMinorGrid 15 Inserts a minor grid.
1e .uno%3AFormatTrendlineEquation 1f Formats the trendline equation.
10 .uno%3ADrawChart 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
11 .uno%3AInsertAxis 27 Opens a dialogue box to insert an axis.
12 .uno%3AFormatFloor 18 Formats the chart floor.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockLoss 22 Formats the stock loss indicators.
13 SW_HID_INSERT_CHART 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AStarChartDialog 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AFormatTrendline 16 Formats the trendline.
16 .uno%3AFormatMeanValue 1c Formats the mean value line.
14 .uno%3AInsertR2Value 33 Inserts the coefficient of determination R² value.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataPoint 20 Formats the selected data point.
16 .uno%3AFormatMinorGrid 17 Formats the minor grid.
15 .uno%3AResetDataPoint 31 Resets the selected data point to default format.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMeanValue 1c Deletes the mean value line.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMajorGrid 17 Deletes the major grid.
13 .uno%3AFormatLegend 19 Formats the chart legend.
16 .uno%3ADeleteMinorGrid 17 Deletes the minor grid.
16 .uno%3AInsertAxisTitle 2d Opens a dialogue box to insert an axis title.
16 .uno%3AFormatChartArea 17 Formats the chart area.
18 .uno%3AInsertObjectChart 10b Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells.
16 .uno%3AInsertMajorGrid 15 Inserts a major grid.
17 .uno%3AInsertRemoveAxes 2e Opens a dialogue box to insert or delete axes.
17 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabels 18 Deletes all data labels.
13 .uno%3ADeleteLegend 19 Deletes the chart legend.
17 .uno%3AInsertDataLabels 14 Inserts data labels.
13 .uno%3AInsertTitles 2c Opens a dialogue box to insert chart titles.
11 .uno%3AFormatWall 17 Formats the chart wall.
16 .uno%3AFormatStockGain 22 Formats the stock gain indicators.
16 .uno%3AFormatDataLabel 20 Formats the selected data label.
16 .uno%3ADeleteDataLabel 20 Deletes the selected data label.
1e .uno%3ADeleteTrendlineEquation 1f Deletes the trendline equation.
14 .uno%3ADeleteR2Value 16 Deletes the R² value.
17 .uno%3AFormatDataLabels 18 Formats the data labels.
17 .uno%3ADeleteYErrorBars 19 Deletes the y-error bars.
16 .uno%3AInsertDataLabel 1c Inserts a single data label.
23 .uno%3AInsertTrendlineEquationAndR2 48 Inserts the trendline equation and the coefficient of determination R².
16 .uno%3AFormatMajorGrid 17 Formats the major grid.
1b .uno%3AChartElementSelector bf Select the element from the chart that you want to format. The element gets selected in the chart preview. Click Format Selection to open the properties dialogue box for the selected element.